]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Fix ELF ppc32 targets that don't use ppc32elf.em
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
56dd11f0 3@c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
56dd11f0 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
56dd11f0 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a
DJ
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
710
252b5132
RH
711@ifset UsesEnvVars
712The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 713@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
714some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
715@end ifset
716
717The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
718@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
719at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
720
721@cindex emulation
722@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 723@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
724Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
725emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
726
727If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
728@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
729
730Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
731configured.
732
733@cindex link map
734@kindex -M
735@kindex --print-map
736@item -M
737@itemx --print-map
738Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
739information about the link, including the following:
740
741@itemize @bullet
742@item
3b83e13a 743Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
744@item
745How common symbols are allocated.
746@item
747All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
748which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
749@item
750The values assigned to symbols.
751
752Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
753involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
754have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
755linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
756of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
757the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
758linker script containing:
759
760@smallexample
761 foo = 1
762 foo = foo * 4
763 foo = foo + 8
764@end smallexample
765
766will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
767option is used:
768
769@smallexample
770 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
773@end smallexample
774
775See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
776scripts.
252b5132
RH
777@end itemize
778
779@kindex -n
780@cindex read-only text
781@cindex NMAGIC
782@kindex --nmagic
783@item -n
784@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
785Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
786libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
787mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
788
789@kindex -N
790@kindex --omagic
791@cindex read/write from cmd line
792@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 793@item -N
252b5132
RH
794@itemx --omagic
795Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
796not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
797libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
798mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
799is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
800specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
801
802@kindex --no-omagic
803@cindex OMAGIC
804@item --no-omagic
805This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
806sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
807be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
808shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
809
810@kindex -o @var{output}
811@kindex --output=@var{output}
812@cindex naming the output file
813@item -o @var{output}
814@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 815Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
816option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
817script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
818
819@kindex -O @var{level}
820@cindex generating optimized output
821@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 822If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 823the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
824should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
825option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
826the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
827no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
828of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 829
a712da20
NC
830@kindex -q
831@kindex --emit-relocs
832@cindex retain relocations in final executable
833@item -q
834@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 835Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
836Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
837order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
838in larger executables.
839
dbab7a7b
NC
840This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
841
4f471f39
RS
842@kindex --force-dynamic
843@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
844@item --force-dynamic
845Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
846to VxWorks targets.
847
252b5132
RH
848@cindex partial link
849@cindex relocatable output
850@kindex -r
1049f94e 851@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 852@item -r
1049f94e 853@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 854Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 855turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
856linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
857magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
858@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 859@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
860If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
861linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
862constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
863
62bf86b4
HPN
864When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
865partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
866relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
867example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
868with input files in other formats at all.
869
252b5132
RH
870This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
871
872@kindex -R @var{file}
873@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
874@cindex symbol-only input
875@item -R @var{filename}
876@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
877Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
878relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
879to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
880programs. You may use this option more than once.
881
ff5dcc92 882For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 883followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 884the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
885
886@kindex -s
887@kindex --strip-all
888@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 889@item -s
252b5132
RH
890@itemx --strip-all
891Omit all symbol information from the output file.
892
893@kindex -S
894@kindex --strip-debug
895@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 896@item -S
252b5132
RH
897@itemx --strip-debug
898Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
899
900@kindex -t
901@kindex --trace
902@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 903@item -t
252b5132 904@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 905Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
906
907@kindex -T @var{script}
908@kindex --script=@var{script}
909@cindex script files
910@item -T @var{scriptfile}
911@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
912Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 913@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 914@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
915output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
916the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
917specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
918options accumulate.
252b5132 919
14be8564
L
920@kindex -dT @var{script}
921@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
922@cindex script files
923@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
924@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
925Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
926
927This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
928processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
929command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
930@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
931behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
932command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
933the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
934@samp{gcc}).
935
252b5132
RH
936@kindex -u @var{symbol}
937@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
938@cindex undefined symbol
939@item -u @var{symbol}
940@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
941Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
942symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
943modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
944different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
945option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
946
947@kindex -Ur
948@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 949@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
950For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
951@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 952turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
953@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
954It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
955with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
956be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
957@samp{-r} for the others.
958
577a0623
AM
959@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
961Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
962@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
963missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
964specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
965multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
966input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
967in a linker script.
a854a4a7 968
252b5132
RH
969@kindex -v
970@kindex -V
971@kindex --version
972@cindex version
973@item -v
974@itemx --version
975@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 976Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
977lists the supported emulations.
978
979@kindex -x
980@kindex --discard-all
981@cindex deleting local symbols
982@item -x
983@itemx --discard-all
984Delete all local symbols.
985
986@kindex -X
987@kindex --discard-locals
988@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 989@item -X
252b5132 990@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
991Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
992system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
993or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
994
995@kindex -y @var{symbol}
996@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997@cindex symbol tracing
998@item -y @var{symbol}
999@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1000Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1001option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1002to prepend an underscore.
1003
1004This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1005don't know where the reference is coming from.
1006
1007@kindex -Y @var{path}
1008@item -Y @var{path}
1009Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1010for Solaris compatibility.
1011
1012@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1013@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1014The recognized keywords are:
1015@table @samp
1016
1017@item combreloc
1018Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1019lookup caching possible.
1020
1021@item defs
560e09e9 1022Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1023shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1024
6aa29e7b
JJ
1025@item execstack
1026Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1027
b039ef04
L
1028@item global
1029This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1030the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1031of subsequently loaded libraries.
1032
cd6d6c15
NC
1033@item initfirst
1034This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1035It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1036before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1037the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1038the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1039objects.
1040
1041@item interpose
1042Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1043but the primary executable.
1044
5fa222e4
AM
1045@item lazy
1046When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1047dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1048the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1049Lazy binding is the default.
1050
cd6d6c15
NC
1051@item loadfltr
1052Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1053runtime.
1054
1055@item muldefs
1056Allows multiple definitions.
1057
1058@item nocombreloc
1059Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1060
1061@item nocopyreloc
1062Disables production of copy relocs.
1063
1064@item nodefaultlib
1065Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1066ignore any default library search paths.
1067
1068@item nodelete
1069Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1070
1071@item nodlopen
1072Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1073
1074@item nodump
1075Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1076
6aa29e7b
JJ
1077@item noexecstack
1078Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1079
1080@item norelro
1081Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1082
cd6d6c15
NC
1083@item now
1084When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1085dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1086when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1087deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1088first called.
1089
1090@item origin
1091Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1092
6aa29e7b
JJ
1093@item relro
1094Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1095
24718e3b
L
1096@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1097Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1098
1099@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1100Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1101
04c3a755
NS
1102@item stack-size=@var{value}
1103Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1104Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1105@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1106
cd6d6c15
NC
1107@end table
1108
ece2d90e 1109Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1110
1111@kindex -(
1112@cindex groups of archives
1113@item -( @var{archives} -)
1114@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1115The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1116either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1117
1118The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1119references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1120the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1121archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1122object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1123would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1124they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1125resolved.
1126
1127Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1128it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1129more archives.
1130
69da35b5
NC
1131@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1134@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1135Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1136recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1137and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1138the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1139behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1140so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1141restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1142
4a43e768
AM
1143@kindex --as-needed
1144@kindex --no-as-needed
1145@item --as-needed
1146@itemx --no-as-needed
1147This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1148on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1149the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1150on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1151needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1152emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1153non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1154the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1155non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1156Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1157the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1158needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1159from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1160
e56f61be
L
1161@kindex --add-needed
1162@kindex --no-add-needed
1163@item --add-needed
1164@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1165These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1166their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1167options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1168and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1169
252b5132
RH
1170@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1171@item -assert @var{keyword}
1172This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1173
1174@kindex -Bdynamic
1175@kindex -dy
1176@kindex -call_shared
1177@item -Bdynamic
1178@itemx -dy
1179@itemx -call_shared
1180Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1181for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1182default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1183for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1184multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1185@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1186
a1ab1d2a
UD
1187@kindex -Bgroup
1188@item -Bgroup
1189Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1190section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1191object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1192@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1193only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1194
252b5132
RH
1195@kindex -Bstatic
1196@kindex -dn
1197@kindex -non_shared
1198@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1199@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1200@itemx -dn
1201@itemx -non_shared
1202@itemx -static
1203Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1204platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1205variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1206may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1207library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1208option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1209option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1210shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1211references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1212libraries.
252b5132
RH
1213
1214@kindex -Bsymbolic
1215@item -Bsymbolic
1216When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1217definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1218for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1219within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1220platforms which support shared libraries.
1221
40b36307
L
1222@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1223@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1224When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1225symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1226This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1227libraries.
1228
55255dae
L
1229@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1230@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1231Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1232typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1233global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1234within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1235to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1236in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1237which support shared libraries.
1238
1239The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1240scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1241
40b36307
L
1242@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1243@item --dynamic-list-data
1244Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1245
1246@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1247@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1248Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1249is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1250
0b8a70d9
L
1251@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1252@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1253Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1254
252b5132
RH
1255@kindex --check-sections
1256@kindex --no-check-sections
1257@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1258@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1259Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1260been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1261perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1262suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1263allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1264restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1265Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1266force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1267option.
252b5132 1268
ddbb8a31
NC
1269@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1271@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1272@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1273This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1274by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1275command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1276output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1277input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1278specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1279follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1280behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1281
1282This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1283libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1284mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1285their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1286required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1287the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1288dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1289symbols.
1290
252b5132
RH
1291@cindex cross reference table
1292@kindex --cref
1293@item --cref
1294Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1295generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1296Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1297
1298The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1299easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1300sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1301symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1302definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1303where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1304symbol are listed.
252b5132 1305
4818e05f
AM
1306@cindex common allocation
1307@kindex --no-define-common
1308@item --no-define-common
1309This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1310The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1311@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1312
1313The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1314the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1315of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1316forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1317Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1318from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1319This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1320and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1321duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1322paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1323
252b5132 1324@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1325@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1326@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1327Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1328address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1329times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1330limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1331context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1332symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1333constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1334using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1335Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1336space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1337@var{expression}.
1338
1339@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1340@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1341@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1342@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1343@itemx --no-demangle
1344These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1345and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1346present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1347underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1348mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1349different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1350to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1351demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1352is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1353
1354@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1355@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1356@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1357@item -I@var{file}
1358@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1359Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1360generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1361linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1362doing.
1363
7ce691ae 1364@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1365@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1366@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1367@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1368Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1369with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1370
252b5132
RH
1371@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1372@item --force-exe-suffix
1373Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1374
1375If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1376@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1377the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1378option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1379Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1380it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1381
1382@kindex --gc-sections
1383@kindex --no-gc-sections
1384@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1385@item --gc-sections
1386@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1387Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1388targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1389performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1390@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1391
d5465ba2
AM
1392@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1393examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1394symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1395command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1396referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1397libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1398referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1399the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1400relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1401
ac69cbc6 1402This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1403@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1404specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1405a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1406
c17d87de
NC
1407@kindex --print-gc-sections
1408@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1409@cindex garbage collection
1410@item --print-gc-sections
1411@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1412List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1413printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1414collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1415default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1416be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1417line.
1418
30824704
RM
1419@kindex --print-output-format
1420@cindex output format
1421@item --print-output-format
1422Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1423other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1424in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1425
252b5132
RH
1426@cindex help
1427@cindex usage
1428@kindex --help
1429@item --help
1430Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1431
ea20a7da
CC
1432@kindex --target-help
1433@item --target-help
1434Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1435
2509a395
SL
1436@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1437@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1438Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1439@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1440
1441@cindex memory usage
1442@kindex --no-keep-memory
1443@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1444@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1445symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1446instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1447necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1448while linking a large executable.
1449
1450@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1451@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1452@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1453@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1454Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1455is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1456The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1457behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1458libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1459
aa713662
L
1460@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1461@kindex -z muldefs
1462@item --allow-multiple-definition
1463@itemx -z muldefs
1464Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1465report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1466first definition will be used.
1467
b79e8c78 1468@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1469@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1470@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1471@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1472Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1473This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1474determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1475shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1476how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1477
903249d7
NC
1478The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1479referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1480an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1481a shared library.
1482
1483The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1484libraries specified at link time are that:
1485
1486@itemize @bullet
1487@item
1488A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1489that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1490resolvable at load time.
1491@item
1492There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1493symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1494
1495The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1496select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1497architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1498appropriate memset function.
1499@end itemize
b79e8c78 1500
31941635
L
1501@kindex --no-undefined-version
1502@item --no-undefined-version
1503Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1504it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1505will be issued instead.
1506
3e3b46e5
PB
1507@kindex --default-symver
1508@item --default-symver
1509Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1510exported symbols.
1511
1512@kindex --default-imported-symver
1513@item --default-imported-symver
1514Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1515imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1516
252b5132
RH
1517@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1518@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1519Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1520files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1521been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1522This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1523errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1524have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1525inappropriate.
1526
fe7929ce
AM
1527@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1528@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1529Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1530library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1531
252b5132
RH
1532@kindex --no-whole-archive
1533@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1534Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1535archive files.
1536
1537@cindex output file after errors
1538@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1539@item --noinhibit-exec
1540Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1541Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1542errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1543when it issues any error whatsoever.
1544
0a9c1c8e
CD
1545@kindex -nostdlib
1546@item -nostdlib
1547Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1548command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1549(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1550
252b5132 1551@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1552@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1553@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1554@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1555file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1556@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1557object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1558object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1559should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1560usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1561name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1562list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1563command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1564this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1565@end ifclear
1566
36af4a4e
JJ
1567@kindex -pie
1568@kindex --pic-executable
1569@item -pie
1570@itemx --pic-executable
1571@cindex position independent executables
1572Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1573ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1574libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1575address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1576normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1577defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1578
252b5132
RH
1579@kindex -qmagic
1580@item -qmagic
1581This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1582
1583@kindex -Qy
1584@item -Qy
1585This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1586
1587@kindex --relax
1588@cindex synthesizing linker
1589@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1590@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1591@item --relax
28d5f677 1592@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1593An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1594@ifset GENERIC
1595This option is only supported on a few targets.
1596@end ifset
1597@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1598@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1599@end ifset
1600@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1601@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1602@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1603@ifset XTENSA
1604@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1605@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1606@ifset M68HC11
1607@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1608@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1609@ifset NIOSII
1610@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1611@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1612@ifset POWERPC
1613@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1614@end ifset
252b5132 1615
28d5f677
NC
1616On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1617global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1618addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1619synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1620instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1621
1622On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1623debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1624@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1625This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1626family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1627@end ifset
1628
1629@ifset GENERIC
1630On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1631but ignored.
1632@end ifset
1633
28d5f677
NC
1634On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1635@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1636
252b5132
RH
1637@cindex retaining specified symbols
1638@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1639@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1640@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1641@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1642Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1643discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1644symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1645@ifset GENERIC
1646(such as VxWorks)
1647@end ifset
1648where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1649run-time memory.
1650
1651@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1652or symbols needed for relocations.
1653
1654You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1655line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1656
1657@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1658@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1659@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1660@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1661Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1662linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1663arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1664them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1665also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1666objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1667@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1668ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1669@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1670
ff5dcc92 1671The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1672SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1673@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1674runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1675options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1676gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1677file systems.
252b5132 1678
ff5dcc92 1679For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1680followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1681the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1682@end ifset
1683
1684@ifset GENERIC
1685@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1686@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1687@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1688When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1689happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1690of the input files.
1691
1692When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1693non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1694shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1695explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1696specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1697@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1698either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1699appearing multiple times.
1700
28c309a2
NC
1701This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1702that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1703is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1704runtime linker would do.
1705
252b5132 1706The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1707libraries:
252b5132
RH
1708@enumerate
1709@item
ff5dcc92 1710Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1711@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1712Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1713between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1714specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1715used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1716at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1717by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1718the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1719@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1720On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1721@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1722environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1723@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1724On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1725directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1726@item
a1b8d843 1727For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1728variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1729@item
ec4eb78a
L
1730For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1731@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1732libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1733@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1734@item
252b5132
RH
1735The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1736@item
1737For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1738exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1739@end enumerate
1740
1741If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1742warning and continue with the link.
1743@end ifset
1744
1745@kindex -shared
1746@kindex -Bshareable
1747@item -shared
1748@itemx -Bshareable
1749@cindex shared libraries
1750Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1751and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1752shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1753undefined symbols in the link.
1754
252b5132 1755@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1756@item --sort-common
1757@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1758@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1759This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1760ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1761sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1762eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1763between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1764specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1765
2509a395
SL
1766@kindex --sort-section=name
1767@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1768This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1769patterns in the linker script.
1770
2509a395
SL
1771@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1772@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1773This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1774patterns in the linker script.
1775
252b5132 1776@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1777@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1778Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1779each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1780size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1781
1782@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1783@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1784Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1785output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1786This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1787certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1788cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1789that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1790support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1791input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1792more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1793many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1794
1795@kindex --stats
1796@item --stats
1797Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1798as execution time and memory usage.
1799
2509a395 1800@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1801@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1802Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1803configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1804that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1805
252b5132
RH
1806@kindex --traditional-format
1807@cindex traditional format
1808@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1809For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1810the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1811use the traditional format instead.
1812
1813@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1814For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1815symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1816full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1817@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1818trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1819combine duplicate entries.
1820
2509a395
SL
1821@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1822@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1823Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1824address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1825times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1826line.
1827@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1828for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1829@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1830should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1831sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1832
2509a395
SL
1833@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1834@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1835@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1836@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1837@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1838@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1839@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1840Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1841@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1842
2509a395
SL
1843@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1844@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1845@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1846When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1847byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1848
9d5777a3
RM
1849@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1850@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1851@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1852When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1853the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1854text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1855
0d705e9f
AM
1856@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1857@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1858@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1859When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1860model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1861
560e09e9
NC
1862@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1863@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1864Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1865values for @samp{method}:
1866
1867@table @samp
1868@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1869Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1870
1871@item report-all
da8bce14 1872Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1873
1874@item ignore-in-object-files
1875Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1876ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1877
1878@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1879Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1880ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1881when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1882libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1883command line.
1884@end table
1885
1886The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1887by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1888
1889Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1890unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1891can change this to a warning.
1892
1715a13c
L
1893@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1894@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1895@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1896@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1897Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1898supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1899the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1900argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1901
1902@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1903@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1904@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1905Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1906used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1907about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1908is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1909see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1910use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1911symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1912@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1913
7ce691ae 1914@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1915@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1916@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1917@item --warn-common
1918Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1919a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1920but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1921you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1922Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1923warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1924
1925There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1926
1927@table @samp
1928@item int i = 1;
1929A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1930file.
1931
1932@item extern int i;
1933An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1934There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1935variable somewhere.
1936
1937@item int i;
1938A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1939variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1940The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1941single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1942size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1943a definition of the same variable.
1944@end table
1945
1946The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1947Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1948just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1949encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1950a common symbol.
1951
1952@enumerate
1953@item
1954Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1955definition for the symbol.
1956@smallexample
1957@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1958 overridden by definition
1959@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1960@end smallexample
1961
1962@item
1963Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1964the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1965except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1966@smallexample
1967@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1968 overriding common
1969@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1970@end smallexample
1971
1972@item
1973Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1974@smallexample
1975@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1976 of `@var{symbol}'
1977@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1978@end smallexample
1979
1980@item
1981Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1982@smallexample
1983@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1984 overridden by larger common
1985@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1986@end smallexample
1987
1988@item
1989Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1990the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1991encountered in a different order.
1992@smallexample
1993@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1994 overriding smaller common
1995@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1996@end smallexample
1997@end enumerate
1998
1999@kindex --warn-constructors
2000@item --warn-constructors
2001Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2002object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2003detect the use of global constructors.
2004
2005@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2006@item --warn-multiple-gp
2007Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2008This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2009Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2010section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2011of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2012base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2013base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2014bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2015large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2016values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2017option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2018
2019@kindex --warn-once
2020@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2021@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2022@item --warn-once
2023Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2024which refers to it.
2025
2026@kindex --warn-section-align
2027@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2028@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2029@item --warn-section-align
2030Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2031alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2032The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2033is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2034the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2035
8fdd7217
NC
2036@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2037@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2038Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2039
a0c402a5
L
2040@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2041@item --warn-alternate-em
2042Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2043
560e09e9
NC
2044@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2045@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2046If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2047@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2048This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2049
2050@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2051@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2052This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2053it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2054
252b5132
RH
2055@kindex --whole-archive
2056@cindex including an entire archive
2057@item --whole-archive
2058For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2059@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2060in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2061files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2062library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2063library. This option may be used more than once.
2064
7ec229ce 2065Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2066about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2067Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2068list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2069your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2070
2509a395
SL
2071@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2072@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2073Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2074@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2075undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2076@var{symbol}.
2077
2078This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2079wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2080wishes to call the system function, it should call
2081@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2082
2083Here is a trivial example:
2084
2085@smallexample
2086void *
cc2f008e 2087__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2088@{
cc2f008e 2089 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2090 return __real_malloc (c);
2091@}
2092@end smallexample
2093
ff5dcc92 2094If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2095all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2096instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2097call the real @code{malloc} function.
2098
2099You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2100links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2101you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2102file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2103call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2104
6aa29e7b
JJ
2105@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2106@item --eh-frame-hdr
2107Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2108@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2109
e41b3a13
JJ
2110@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2111@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2112Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2113generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2114if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2115
6c1439be
L
2116@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2117@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2118@item --enable-new-dtags
2119@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2120This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2121systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2122@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2123and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2124If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2125created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2126those options are only available for ELF systems.
2127
2d643429 2128@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2129@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2130Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2131close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2132time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2133increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2134value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2135
fdc90cb4
JJ
2136@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2137@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2138Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2139@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2140new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2141the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2142hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2143
35835446
JR
2144@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2145@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2146This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2147linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2148for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2149about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2150
4f9c04f7 2151Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21521021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2153run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2154has been used.
2155
2156The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2157enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2158
c0065db7
RM
2159@kindex --build-id
2160@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2161@item --build-id
2162@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2163Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2164The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2165file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2166@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2167parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2168@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2169@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2170an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2171characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2172omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2173
2174The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2175that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2176unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2177to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2178file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2179string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2180
2181Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2182@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2183@end table
2184
0285c67d
NC
2185@c man end
2186
36f63dca 2187@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2188
0285c67d
NC
2189@c man begin OPTIONS
2190
ff5dcc92 2191The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2192the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2193normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2194use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2195@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2196like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2197symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2198object file).
2199
2200In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2201support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2202PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2203values by either a space or an equals sign.
2204
ff5dcc92 2205@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2206
2207@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2208@item --add-stdcall-alias
2209If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2210as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2211[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2212
2213@kindex --base-file
2214@item --base-file @var{file}
2215Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2216addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2217@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2218[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2219
2220@kindex --dll
2221@item --dll
2222Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2223@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2224file.
bb10df36 2225[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2226
88183869
DK
2227@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2228@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2229@item --enable-long-section-names
2230@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2231The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2232the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2233for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2234fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2235to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2236allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2237disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2238generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2239as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2240with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2241GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2242information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2243option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2244section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2245when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2246image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2247[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2248
252b5132
RH
2249@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2250@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2251@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2252@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2253If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2254do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2255only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2256resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2257undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2258@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2259to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2260warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2261import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2262to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2263feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2264@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2265mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2267
522f09cd
KT
2268@kindex --leading-underscore
2269@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2270@item --leading-underscore
2271@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2272For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2273in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2274disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2275
252b5132
RH
2276@cindex DLLs, creating
2277@kindex --export-all-symbols
2278@item --export-all-symbols
2279If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2280be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2281otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2282explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2283attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2284option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2285@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2286@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2287exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2288re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2289such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2290@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2291@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2292Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2293not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2294extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2295(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2296These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2297@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2298@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2299@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2300@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2301[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2302
2303@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2304@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2305Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2306exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2308
2927aaca
NC
2309@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2310@item --exclude-all-symbols
2311Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2313
252b5132
RH
2314@kindex --file-alignment
2315@item --file-alignment
2316Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2317file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2318512.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2320
2321@cindex heap size
2322@kindex --heap
2323@item --heap @var{reserve}
2324@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2325Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2326to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2327committed.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@cindex image base
2331@kindex --image-base
2332@item --image-base @var{value}
2333Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2334the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2335is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2336your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2337other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2338for dlls.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2340
2341@kindex --kill-at
2342@item --kill-at
2343If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2344symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2345[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2346
26d2d8a2
BF
2347@kindex --large-address-aware
2348@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2349If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2350header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2351greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2352or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2353section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2354[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2355
f69a2f97
NC
2356@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2357@item --disable-large-address-aware
2358Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2359This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2360driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2361addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2362[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2363
252b5132
RH
2364@kindex --major-image-version
2365@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2366Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --major-os-version
2370@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2371Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2372[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2373
2374@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2375@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2376Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@kindex --minor-image-version
2380@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2381Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2383
2384@kindex --minor-os-version
2385@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2386Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2388
2389@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2390@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2391Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2392[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2393
2394@cindex DEF files, creating
2395@cindex DLLs, creating
2396@kindex --output-def
2397@item --output-def @var{file}
2398The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2399file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2400(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2401library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2402automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2403[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2404
b044cda1
CW
2405@cindex DLLs, creating
2406@kindex --out-implib
2407@item --out-implib @var{file}
2408The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2409import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2410import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2411may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2412makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2413creation step.
bb10df36 2414[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2415
2416@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2417@item --enable-auto-image-base
2418Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2419using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2420from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2421collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2422avoided.
bb10df36 2423[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2424
2425@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2426@item --disable-auto-image-base
2427Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2428user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2429default.
bb10df36 2430[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2431
2432@cindex DLLs, linking to
2433@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2434@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2435When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2436search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2437@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2438between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2439uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2440@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2441[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2442
2443@kindex --enable-auto-import
2444@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2445Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2446DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2447building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2448'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2449to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2450specification published by Microsoft.
2451
e2a83dd0
NC
2452Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2453data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2454placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2455around a problem with consts that is described here:
2456http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2457
4d8907ac
DS
2458Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2459see this message:
0d888aac 2460
ece2d90e 2461"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2462documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2463
ece2d90e
NC
2464This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2465ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2466allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2467fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2468constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2469multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2470this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2471of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2472the warning, and exit.
2473
2474There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2475data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2476
2fa9fc65
NC
2477One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2478of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2479this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2480
c0065db7
RM
2481A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2482that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2483there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2484a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2485
2486@example
2487extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2488extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2489 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2490@end example
2491
2492or
2493
2494@example
2495extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2496extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2497 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2498@end example
2499
c0065db7 2500For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2501is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2502
2503@example
2504extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2505extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2506 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2507@end example
2508
c406afaf
NC
2509or
2510
2511@example
2512extern long long extern_ll;
2513extern_ll -->
2514 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2515@end example
2516
2fa9fc65 2517A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2518'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2519@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2520requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2521building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2522merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2523between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2524constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2525
2526Original:
2527@example
2528--foo.h
2529extern int arr[];
2530--foo.c
2531#include "foo.h"
2532void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2533 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2534@}
2535@end example
2536
2537Solution 1:
2538@example
2539--foo.h
2540extern int arr[];
2541--foo.c
2542#include "foo.h"
2543void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2544 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2545 volatile int *parr = arr;
2546 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2547@}
2548@end example
2549
2550Solution 2:
2551@example
2552--foo.h
2553/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2554#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2555 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2556#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2557#else
2558#define FOO_IMPORT
2559#endif
2560extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2561--foo.c
2562#include "foo.h"
2563void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2564 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2565@}
2566@end example
2567
c0065db7 2568A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2569library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2570for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2571functions).
bb10df36 2572[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2573
2574@kindex --disable-auto-import
2575@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2576Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2577@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2578[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2579
2fa9fc65
NC
2580@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2581@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2582If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2583that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2584a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2585environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2586[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2587
2588@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2589@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2590Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2591DLLs.
bb10df36 2592[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2593
b044cda1
CW
2594@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2595@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2596Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2597[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2598
252b5132
RH
2599@kindex --section-alignment
2600@item --section-alignment
2601Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2602addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2603[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2604
2605@cindex stack size
2606@kindex --stack
2607@item --stack @var{reserve}
2608@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2609Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2610to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2611committed.
bb10df36 2612[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2613
2614@kindex --subsystem
2615@item --subsystem @var{which}
2616@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2617@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2618Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2619legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2620@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2621the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2622@var{which}.
bb10df36 2623[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2624
2f563b51
DK
2625The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2626of the PE file header:
2627[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2628
2629@kindex --dynamicbase
2630@item --dynamicbase
2631The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2632randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2633Vista for i386 PE targets.
2634
2635@kindex --forceinteg
2636@item --forceinteg
2637Code integrity checks are enforced.
2638
2639@kindex --nxcompat
2640@item --nxcompat
2641The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2642This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2643
2644@kindex --no-isolation
2645@item --no-isolation
2646Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2647
2648@kindex --no-seh
2649@item --no-seh
2650The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2651this image.
2652
2653@kindex --no-bind
2654@item --no-bind
2655Do not bind this image.
2656
2657@kindex --wdmdriver
2658@item --wdmdriver
2659The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2660
2f563b51
DK
2661@kindex --tsaware
2662@item --tsaware
2663The image is Terminal Server aware.
2664
0cb112f7
CF
2665@kindex --insert-timestamp
2666@item --insert-timestamp
2667Insert a real timestamp into the image, rather than the default value
2668of zero. This will result in a slightly different results with each
2669invocation, which could be helpful for distributing unique images.
252b5132
RH
2670@end table
2671
0285c67d
NC
2672@c man end
2673
ac145307
BS
2674@ifset C6X
2675@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2676
2677@c man begin OPTIONS
2678
2679The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2680libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2681all executables use an index of 0.
2682
2683@table @gcctabopt
2684
2685@kindex --dsbt-size
2686@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2687This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2688or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2689entries.
2690
2691@kindex --dsbt-index
2692@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2693This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2694to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2695executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2696@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2697
fbd9ad90
PB
2698@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2699The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2700exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2701
ac145307
BS
2702@end table
2703
2704@c man end
2705@end ifset
2706
93fd0973
SC
2707@ifset M68HC11
2708@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2709
2710@c man begin OPTIONS
2711
2712The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2713memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2714
2715@table @gcctabopt
2716
2717@kindex --no-trampoline
2718@item --no-trampoline
2719This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2720is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2721instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2722
2723@kindex --bank-window
2724@item --bank-window @var{name}
2725This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2726the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2727The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2728paging and addresses within the memory window.
2729
2730@end table
2731
2732@c man end
2733@end ifset
2734
7fb9f789
NC
2735@ifset M68K
2736@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2737
2738@c man begin OPTIONS
2739
2740The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2741when linking for 68K targets.
2742
2743@table @gcctabopt
2744
2745@kindex --got
2746@item --got=@var{type}
2747This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2748@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2749@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2750Info entry for @file{ld}.
2751
2752@end table
2753
2754@c man end
2755@end ifset
2756
833794fc
MR
2757@ifset MIPS
2758@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2759
2760@c man begin OPTIONS
2761
2762The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2763generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2764
2765@table @gcctabopt
2766
2767@kindex --insn32
2768@item --insn32
2769@kindex --no-insn32
2770@itemx --no-insn32
2771These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2772generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2773or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
277432-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2775used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2776possible.
2777
2778@end table
2779
2780@c man end
2781@end ifset
2782
252b5132
RH
2783@ifset UsesEnvVars
2784@node Environment
2785@section Environment Variables
2786
0285c67d
NC
2787@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2788
560e09e9 2789You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2790@ifclear SingleFormat
2791@code{GNUTARGET},
2792@end ifclear
2793@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2794
36f63dca 2795@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2796@kindex GNUTARGET
2797@cindex default input format
2798@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2799use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2800of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2801@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2802of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2803attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2804this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2805there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2806object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2807BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2808in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2809@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2810
2811@kindex LDEMULATION
2812@cindex default emulation
2813@cindex emulation, default
2814@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2815@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2816behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2817available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2818the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2819variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2820linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2821
2822@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2823@cindex demangling, default
2824Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2825@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2826default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2827a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2828may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2829options.
2830
0285c67d
NC
2831@c man end
2832@end ifset
2833
252b5132
RH
2834@node Scripts
2835@chapter Linker Scripts
2836
2837@cindex scripts
2838@cindex linker scripts
2839@cindex command files
2840Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2841written in the linker command language.
2842
2843The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2844the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2845the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2846more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2847direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2848described below.
2849
2850The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2851yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2852linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2853to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2854such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2855
2856You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2857line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2858default linker script.
2859
2860You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2861to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2862Linker Scripts}.
2863
2864@menu
2865* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2866* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2867* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2868* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2869* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2870* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2871* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2872* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2873* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2874* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2875* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2876@end menu
2877
2878@node Basic Script Concepts
2879@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2880@cindex linker script concepts
2881We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2882describe the linker script language.
2883
2884The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2885file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2886@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2887The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2888purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2889among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2890section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2891in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2892
2893Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2894also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2895contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2896the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2897A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2898area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2899loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2900which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2901of debugging information.
2902
2903Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2904first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2905the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2906@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2907section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2908same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2909is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2910(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2911based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2912RAM address would be the VMA.
2913
2914You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2915program with the @samp{-h} option.
2916
2917Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2918@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2919has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2920information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2921will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2922static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2923referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2924
2925You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2926program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2927option.
2928
2929@node Script Format
2930@section Linker Script Format
2931@cindex linker script format
2932Linker scripts are text files.
2933
2934You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2935either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2936symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2937generally ignored.
2938
2939Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2940If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2941otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2942double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2943file name.
2944
2945You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2946@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2947to whitespace.
2948
2949@node Simple Example
2950@section Simple Linker Script Example
2951@cindex linker script example
2952@cindex example of linker script
2953Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2954
2955The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2956@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2957memory layout of the output file.
2958
2959The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2960describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2961code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2962@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2963Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2964your input files.
2965
2966For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29670x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2968linker script which will do that:
2969@smallexample
2970SECTIONS
2971@{
2972 . = 0x10000;
2973 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2974 . = 0x8000000;
2975 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2976 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2977@}
2978@end smallexample
2979
2980You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2981followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2982descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2983
252b5132
RH
2984The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2985sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2986counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2987other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2988current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2989incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2990@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2991
2992The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2993required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2994after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2995which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2996wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2997means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2998
2999Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3000@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3001@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3002
3003The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3004the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3005at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3006output section, the value of the location counter will be
3007@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3008effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3009immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3010
3011The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3012alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3013example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3014sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3015may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3016sections.
3017
3018That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3019
3020@node Simple Commands
3021@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3022@cindex linker script simple commands
3023In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3024
3025@menu
3026* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3027* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3028@ifclear SingleFormat
3029* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3030@end ifclear
3031
4a93e180 3032* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3033* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3034@end menu
3035
3036@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3037@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3038@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3039@cindex start of execution
3040@cindex first instruction
3041@cindex entry point
3042The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3043point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3044entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3045@smallexample
3046ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3047@end smallexample
3048
3049There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3050entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3051stopping when one of them succeeds:
3052@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3053@item
252b5132 3054the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3055@item
252b5132 3056the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3057@item
3ab904c4
NC
3058the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3059targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3060check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3061@item
252b5132 3062the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3063@item
252b5132
RH
3064The address @code{0}.
3065@end itemize
3066
3067@node File Commands
36f63dca 3068@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3069@cindex linker script file commands
3070Several linker script commands deal with files.
3071
3072@table @code
3073@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3074@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3075@cindex including a linker script
3076Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3077be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3078with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
307910 levels deep.
3080
4006703d
NS
3081You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3082@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3083
252b5132
RH
3084@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3085@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3086@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3087@cindex input files in linker scripts
3088@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3089@cindex linker script input object files
3090The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3091in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3092
3093For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3094a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3095then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3096
3097In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3098script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3099
e3f2db7f
AO
3100In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3101with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3102located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3103for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3104open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3105linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3106description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3107
ff5dcc92 3108If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3109name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3110@samp{-l}.
3111
3112When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3113files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3114script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3115
3116@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3117@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3118@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3119@cindex grouping input files
3120The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3121files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3122new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3123in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3124
b717d30e
JJ
3125@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3126@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3127@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3128This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3129commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3130as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3131with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3132when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3133@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3134and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3135setting afterwards.
3136
252b5132
RH
3137@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3138@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3139@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3140The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3141@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3142@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3143Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3144precedence.
3145
3146You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3147output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3148
3149@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3150@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3151@cindex library search path in linker script
3152@cindex archive search path in linker script
3153@cindex search path in linker script
3154The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3155@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3156@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3157on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3158are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3159the command line option are searched first.
3160
3161@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3162@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3163@cindex first input file
3164The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3165that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3166though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3167when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3168first file.
3169@end table
3170
3171@ifclear SingleFormat
3172@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3173@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3174A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3175
3176@table @code
3177@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3178@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3179@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3180@cindex output file format in linker script
3181The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3182output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3183exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3184(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3185line option takes precedence.
3186
3187You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3188formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3189This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3190desired endianness.
3191
3192If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3193will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3194output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3195used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3196
3197For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3198command:
3199@smallexample
3200OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3201@end smallexample
3202This says that the default format for the output file is
3203@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3204option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3205format.
3206
3207@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3208@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3209@cindex input file format in linker script
3210The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3211files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3212This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3213(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3214is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3215command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3216@end table
3217@end ifclear
3218
4a93e180
NC
3219@node REGION_ALIAS
3220@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3221@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3222@cindex region alias
3223@cindex region names
3224
3225Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3226@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3227
3228@smallexample
3229REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3230@end smallexample
3231
3232The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3233memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3234to memory regions. An example follows.
3235
3236Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3237memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3238that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3239non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3240access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3241read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3242sections:
3243
3244@itemize @bullet
3245@item
3246@code{.text} program code;
3247@item
3248@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3249@item
3250@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3251@item
3252@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3253@end itemize
3254
3255The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3256part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3257output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3258systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3259@code{C}:
3260@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3261@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3262@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3263@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3264@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3265@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3266@end multitable
3267The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3268loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3269the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3270the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3271
3272The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3273includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3274memory layout:
3275@smallexample
3276INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3277
3278SECTIONS
3279 @{
3280 .text :
3281 @{
3282 *(.text)
3283 @} > REGION_TEXT
3284 .rodata :
3285 @{
3286 *(.rodata)
3287 rodata_end = .;
3288 @} > REGION_RODATA
3289 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3290 @{
3291 data_start = .;
3292 *(.data)
3293 @} > REGION_DATA
3294 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3295 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3296 .bss :
3297 @{
3298 *(.bss)
3299 @} > REGION_BSS
3300 @}
3301@end smallexample
3302
3303Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3304regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3305variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3306@table @code
3307@item A
3308Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3309@smallexample
3310MEMORY
3311 @{
3312 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3313 @}
3314
3315REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3316REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3317REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3318REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3319@end smallexample
3320@item B
3321Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3322into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3323@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3324@smallexample
3325MEMORY
3326 @{
3327 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3328 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3329 @}
3330
3331REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3332REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3333REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3334REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3335@end smallexample
3336@item C
3337Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3338@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3339initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3340system start into the @code{RAM}.
3341@smallexample
3342MEMORY
3343 @{
3344 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3345 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3346 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3347 @}
3348
3349REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3350REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3351REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3352REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3353@end smallexample
3354@end table
3355
3356It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3357@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3358necessary:
3359@smallexample
3360#include <string.h>
3361
3362extern char data_start [];
3363extern char data_size [];
3364extern char data_load_start [];
3365
3366void copy_data(void)
3367@{
3368 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3369 @{
3370 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3371 @}
3372@}
3373@end smallexample
3374
252b5132 3375@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3376@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3377There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3378
3379@table @code
3380@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3381@kindex ASSERT
3382@cindex assertion in linker script
3383Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3384with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3385
3386@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3387@kindex EXTERN
3388@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3389Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3390symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3391modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3392each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3393command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3394
3395@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3396@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3397@cindex common allocation in linker script
3398This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3399to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3400output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3401
4818e05f
AM
3402@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3403@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3404@cindex common allocation in linker script
3405This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3406command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3407to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3408
53d25da6
AM
3409@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3410@kindex INSERT
3411@cindex insert user script into default script
3412This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3413augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3414inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3415@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3416default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3417sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3418linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3419insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3420linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3421default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3422of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3423to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3424is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3425
3426@smallexample
3427SECTIONS
3428@{
3429 OVERLAY :
3430 @{
3431 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3432 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3433 @}
3434@}
3435INSERT AFTER .text;
3436@end smallexample
3437
252b5132
RH
3438@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3439@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3440@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3441This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3442references among certain output sections.
3443
3444In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3445using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3446will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3447errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3448a function defined in the other section.
3449
3450The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3451@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3452an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3453@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3454names.
3455
3456@ifclear SingleFormat
3457@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3458@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3459@cindex machine architecture
3460@cindex architecture
3461Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3462of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3463architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3464the @samp{-f} option.
3465@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3466
3467@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3468@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3469This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3470@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3471in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3472@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3473@end table
3474
3475@node Assignments
3476@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3477@cindex assignment in scripts
3478@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3479@cindex variables, defining
3480You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3481the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3482
3483@menu
3484* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3485* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3486* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3487* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3488* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3489@end menu
3490
3491@node Simple Assignments
3492@subsection Simple Assignments
3493
3494You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3495
3496@table @code
3497@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3498@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3499@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3500@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3501@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3502@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3503@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3504@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3505@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3506@end table
3507
3508The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3509@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3510defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3511
3512The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3513may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3514
3515The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3516
3517Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3518
3519You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3520statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3521section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3522
3523The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3524expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3525
3526Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3527assignments may be used:
3528
3529@smallexample
3530floating_point = 0;
3531SECTIONS
3532@{
3533 .text :
3534 @{
3535 *(.text)
3536 _etext = .;
3537 @}
156e34dd 3538 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3539 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3540@}
3541@end smallexample
3542@noindent
3543In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3544zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3545the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3546defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3547upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3548
eb8476a6
MR
3549@node HIDDEN
3550@subsection HIDDEN
3551@cindex HIDDEN
3552For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3553exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3554
3555Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3556@code{HIDDEN}:
3557
3558@smallexample
3559HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3560SECTIONS
3561@{
3562 .text :
3563 @{
3564 *(.text)
3565 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3566 @}
3567 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3568 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3569@}
3570@end smallexample
3571@noindent
3572In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3573
252b5132
RH
3574@node PROVIDE
3575@subsection PROVIDE
3576@cindex PROVIDE
3577In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3578only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3579the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3580@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3581@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3582@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3583@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3584@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3585
3586Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3587@smallexample
3588SECTIONS
3589@{
3590 .text :
3591 @{
3592 *(.text)
3593 _etext = .;
3594 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3595 @}
3596@}
3597@end smallexample
3598
3599In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3600underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3601the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3602underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3603If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3604linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3605
7af8e998
L
3606@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3607@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3608@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3609Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3610hidden and won't be exported.
3611
73ae6183
NC
3612@node Source Code Reference
3613@subsection Source Code Reference
3614
3615Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3616intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3617a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3618symbol that does not have a value.
3619
3620Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3621transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3622stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3623prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3624mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3625of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3626variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3627linker script variable might be referred to as:
3628
3629@smallexample
3630 extern int foo;
3631@end smallexample
3632
3633But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3634
3635@smallexample
3636 _foo = 1000;
3637@end smallexample
3638
3639In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3640transformation has taken place.
3641
3642When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3643things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3644in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3645second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3646table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3647contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3648value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3649
3650@smallexample
3651 int foo = 1000;
3652@end smallexample
3653
10bf6894 3654creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3655holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3656number 1000 is initially stored.
3657
3658When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3659first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3660memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3661So:
3662
3663@smallexample
3664 foo = 1;
3665@end smallexample
3666
3667looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3668associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3669address. Whereas:
3670
3671@smallexample
3672 int * a = & foo;
3673@end smallexample
3674
10bf6894 3675looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3676and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3677the variable @samp{a}.
3678
3679Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3680the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3681an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3682
3683@smallexample
3684 foo = 1000;
3685@end smallexample
3686
3687creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3688the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3689address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3690linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3691access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3692
3693Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3694you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3695use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3696section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3697linker script contains these declarations:
3698
3699@smallexample
3700@group
3701 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3702 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3703 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3704@end group
3705@end smallexample
3706
3707Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3708
3709@smallexample
3710@group
3711 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3712
73ae6183
NC
3713 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3714@end group
3715@end smallexample
3716
3717Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3718
252b5132 3719@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3720@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3721@kindex SECTIONS
3722The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3723into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3724
3725The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3726@smallexample
3727SECTIONS
3728@{
3729 @var{sections-command}
3730 @var{sections-command}
3731 @dots{}
3732@}
3733@end smallexample
3734
3735Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3736
3737@itemize @bullet
3738@item
3739an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3740@item
3741a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3742@item
3743an output section description
3744@item
3745an overlay description
3746@end itemize
3747
3748The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3749@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3750those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3751understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3752the layout of the output file.
3753
3754Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3755below.
3756
3757If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3758linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3759section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3760input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3761example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3762in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3763
3764@menu
3765* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3766* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3767* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3768* Input Section:: Input section description
3769* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3770* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3771* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3772* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3773* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3774@end menu
3775
3776@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3777@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3778The full description of an output section looks like this:
3779@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3780@group
7e7d5768 3781@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3782 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3783 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3784 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3785 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3786 @{
3787 @var{output-section-command}
3788 @var{output-section-command}
3789 @dots{}
562d3460 3790 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3791@end group
3792@end smallexample
3793
3794Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3795
3796The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3797name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3798The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3799
3800Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3801
3802@itemize @bullet
3803@item
3804a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3805@item
3806an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3807@item
3808data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3809@item
3810a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3811@end itemize
3812
3813@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3814@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3815@cindex name, section
3816@cindex section name
3817The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3818meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3819support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3820must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3821example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3822output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3823names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3824quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3825characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3826commas must be quoted.
3827
3828The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3829Discarding}.
3830
3831@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3832@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3833@cindex address, section
3834@cindex section address
3835The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3836address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3837is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3838
3839If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3840section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3841to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3842alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3843contained within the output section.
3844
3845The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3846
3847@itemize @bullet
3848@item
3849If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3850is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3851in that region.
3852
3853@item
3854If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3855regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3856section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3857be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3858
3859@item
3860If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3861the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3862counter.
3863@end itemize
3864
3865@noindent
3866For example:
3867
252b5132
RH
3868@smallexample
3869.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3870@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3871
252b5132
RH
3872@noindent
3873and
ea5cae92 3874
252b5132
RH
3875@smallexample
3876.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3877@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3878
252b5132
RH
3879@noindent
3880are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3881@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3882counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3883counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3884input sections.
252b5132
RH
3885
3886The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3887For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3888so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3889do something like this:
3890@smallexample
3891.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3892@end smallexample
3893@noindent
3894This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3895aligned upward to the specified value.
3896
3897Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3898location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3899sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3900
3901@node Input Section
36f63dca 3902@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3903@cindex input sections
3904@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3905The most common output section command is an input section description.
3906
3907The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3908You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3909in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3910map the input files into your memory layout.
3911
3912@menu
3913* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3914* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3915* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3916* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3917* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3918@end menu
3919
3920@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3921@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3922@cindex input section basics
3923An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3924by a list of section names in parentheses.
3925
3926The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3927describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3928
3929The most common input section description is to include all input
3930sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3931include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3932@smallexample
3933*(.text)
3934@end smallexample
3935@noindent
18625d54
CM
3936Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3937of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3938match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3939example:
252b5132 3940@smallexample
b4346c09 3941*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3942@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3943will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3944@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3945
3946There are two ways to include more than one section:
3947@smallexample
3948*(.text .rdata)
3949*(.text) *(.rdata)
3950@end smallexample
3951@noindent
3952The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3953@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3954first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3955they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3956@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3957@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3958
3959You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3960You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3961needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3962@smallexample
3963data.o(.data)
3964@end smallexample
3965
ae17ab41
CM
3966To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3967of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3968
3969Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3970
3971@smallexample
3972@group
3973SECTIONS @{
3974 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3975 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3976@}
3977@end group
3978@end smallexample
3979
3980In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3981input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3982@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3983@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3984whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3985
967928e9
AM
3986You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3987matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3988with no whitespace around the colon.
3989
3990@table @samp
3991@item archive:file
3992matches file within archive
3993@item archive:
3994matches the whole archive
3995@item :file
3996matches file but not one in an archive
3997@end table
3998
3999Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4000wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4001single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4002@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4003within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4004also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4005other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4006from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4007command.
4008
252b5132
RH
4009If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4010the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4011commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4012@smallexample
4013data.o
4014@end smallexample
4015
967928e9
AM
4016When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4017and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4018characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4019name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4020did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4021though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4022@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4023the archive search path.
4024
4025@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4026@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4027@cindex input section wildcards
4028@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4029@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4030@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4031In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4032name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4033
4034The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4035pattern for the file name.
4036
4037The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4038
4039@table @samp
4040@item *
4041matches any number of characters
4042@item ?
4043matches any single character
4044@item [@var{chars}]
4045matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4046character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4047@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4048@item \
4049quotes the following character
4050@end table
4051
4052When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4053will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4054Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4055exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4056@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4057a @samp{/} character.
4058
4059File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4060specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4061does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4062
4063If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4064appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4065will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4066sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4067@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4068@smallexample
4069.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4070.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4071@end smallexample
4072
bcaa7b3e 4073@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4074Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4075in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4076this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4077pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4078@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4079into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4080
bcaa7b3e
L
4081@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4082@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4083difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4084descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4085Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4086reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4087
02ecc8e9
L
4088@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4089@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4090difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4091ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4092encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4093
bcaa7b3e
L
4094@cindex SORT
4095@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4096
4097When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4098can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4099
4100@enumerate
4101@item
4102@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4103It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4104sections have the same name.
4105@item
4106@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4107It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4108sections have the same alignment.
4109@item
c0065db7 4110@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4111treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4112@item
4113@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4114is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4115@item
4116All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4117@end enumerate
4118
4119When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4120section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4121takes precedence over the command line option.
4122
4123If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4124command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4125treated as nested sorting command.
4126
4127@enumerate
4128@item
4129@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4130@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4131@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4132@item
4133@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4134@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4135@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4136@end enumerate
4137
4138If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4139command line option will be ignored.
4140
eda680f8
L
4141@cindex SORT_NONE
4142@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4143section sorting option.
4144
252b5132
RH
4145If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4146@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4147precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4148
4149This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4150files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4151sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4152The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4153with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4154linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4155@smallexample
4156@group
4157SECTIONS @{
4158 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4159 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4160 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4161 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4162@}
4163@end group
4164@end smallexample
4165
4166@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4167@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4168@cindex common symbol placement
4169@cindex uninitialized data placement
4170A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4171file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4172linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4173named @samp{COMMON}.
4174
4175You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4176other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4177particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4178input files are placed in another section.
4179
4180In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4181@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4182@smallexample
4183.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4184@end smallexample
4185
4186@cindex scommon section
4187@cindex small common symbols
4188Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4189example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4190symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4191different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4192the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4193symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4194to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4195locations.
4196
4197@cindex [COMMON]
4198You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4199notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4200@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4201
4202@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4203@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4204@cindex KEEP
4205@cindex garbage collection
4206When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4207it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4208This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4209with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4210@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4211
4212@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4213@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4214The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4215to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4216start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4217@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4218follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4219@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4220@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4221All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4222files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4223
4224@smallexample
4225@group
4226SECTIONS @{
4227 outputa 0x10000 :
4228 @{
4229 all.o
4230 foo.o (.input1)
4231 @}
36f63dca
NC
4232@end group
4233@group
252b5132
RH
4234 outputb :
4235 @{
4236 foo.o (.input2)
4237 foo1.o (.input1)
4238 @}
36f63dca
NC
4239@end group
4240@group
252b5132
RH
4241 outputc :
4242 @{
4243 *(.input1)
4244 *(.input2)
4245 @}
4246@}
4247@end group
a1ab1d2a 4248@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4249
4250@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4251@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4252@cindex data
4253@cindex section data
4254@cindex output section data
4255@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4256@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4257@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4258@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4259@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4260You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4261@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4262an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4263parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4264value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4265counter.
4266
4267The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4268store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4269bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4270stored.
4271
4272For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4273of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4274@smallexample
4275BYTE(1)
4276LONG(addr)
4277@end smallexample
4278
4279When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4280same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4281target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4282@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4283@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4284
4285If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4286which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4287When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4288true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4289endianness of the first input object file.
4290
36f63dca 4291Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4292between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4293@smallexample
4294SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4295@end smallexample
4296whereas this will work:
4297@smallexample
4298SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4299@end smallexample
4300
252b5132
RH
4301@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4302@cindex holes, filling
4303@cindex unspecified memory
4304You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4305current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4306otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4307gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4308with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4309necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4310point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4311than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4312different parts of an output section.
4313
4314This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4315value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4316@smallexample
563e308f 4317FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4318@end smallexample
4319
4320The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4321section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4322part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4323entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4324precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4325expression.
252b5132
RH
4326
4327@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4328@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4329There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4330commands.
4331
4332@table @code
4333@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4334@cindex input filename symbols
4335@cindex filename symbols
4336@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4337The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4338The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4339file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4340the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4341
4342This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4343normally used for any other object file format.
4344
4345@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4346@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4347@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4348@item CONSTRUCTORS
4349When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4350unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4351destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4352arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4353automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4354For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4355linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4356@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4357ignored for other object file formats.
4358
4359The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4360constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4361Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4362the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4363first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4364of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4365compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4366formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4367@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4368the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4369destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4370@code{exit}.
4371
4372For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4373arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4374addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4375and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4376linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4377runtime code expects to see.
4378
4379@smallexample
4380 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4381 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4382 *(.ctors)
4383 LONG(0)
4384 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4385 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4386 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4387 *(.dtors)
4388 LONG(0)
4389 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4390@end smallexample
4391
4392If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4393which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4394are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4395are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4396command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4397@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4398@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4399@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4400
4401Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4402and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4403need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4404scripts.
4405
4406@end table
4407
4408@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4409@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4410@cindex discarding sections
4411@cindex sections, discarding
4412@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4413The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4414This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4415may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4416@smallexample
49c13adb 4417.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4418@end smallexample
4419@noindent
4420will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4421@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4422sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4423space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4424too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4425space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4426@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4427@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4428This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4429
a0976ea4 4430The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4431on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4432symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4433the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4434section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4435
4436@cindex /DISCARD/
4437The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4438input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4439section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4440
4441@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4442@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4443@cindex output section attributes
4444We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4445like this:
0c71d759 4446
252b5132 4447@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4448@group
7e7d5768 4449@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4450 [AT(@var{lma})]
4451 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4452 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4453 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4454 @{
4455 @var{output-section-command}
4456 @var{output-section-command}
4457 @dots{}
562d3460 4458 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4459@end group
4460@end smallexample
0c71d759 4461
252b5132
RH
4462We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4463@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4464remaining section attributes.
4465
a1ab1d2a 4466@menu
252b5132
RH
4467* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4468* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4469* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4470* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4471* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4472* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4473* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4474* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4475@end menu
4476
4477@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4478@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4479Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4480parentheses. The following types are defined:
4481
4482@table @code
4483@item NOLOAD
4484The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4485loaded into memory when the program is run.
4486@item DSECT
4487@itemx COPY
4488@itemx INFO
4489@itemx OVERLAY
4490These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4491rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4492marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4493section when the program is run.
4494@end table
4495
4496@kindex NOLOAD
4497@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4498@cindex loading, preventing
4499The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4500the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4501the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4502@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4503need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4504@smallexample
4505@group
4506SECTIONS @{
4507 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4508 @dots{}
4509@}
4510@end group
4511@end smallexample
4512
4513@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4514@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4515@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4516@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4517@cindex load address
4518@cindex section load address
4519Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4520@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4521@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4522specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4523address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4524
ea5cae92
NC
4525The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4526specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4527takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4528load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4529region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4530
4531If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4532section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4533load address:
4534
4535@itemize @bullet
4536@item
4537If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4538the LMA address as well.
4539
4540@item
4541If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4542
4543@item
4544Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4545with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4546section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4547VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4548the last section in the located region.
4549
4550@item
4551If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4552that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4553
4554@item
4555If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4556section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4557@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4558
4559@cindex ROM initialized data
4560@cindex initialized data in ROM
4561This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4562example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4563called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4564@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4565even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4566uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4567defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4568counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4569
4570@smallexample
4571@group
4572SECTIONS
4573 @{
4574 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4575 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4576 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4577 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4578 .bss 0x3000 :
4579 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4580@}
4581@end group
4582@end smallexample
4583
4584The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4585this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4586the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4587how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4588script.
4589
4590@smallexample
4591@group
4592extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4593char *src = &_etext;
4594char *dst = &_data;
4595
ea5cae92
NC
4596/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4597while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4598 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4599
ea5cae92 4600/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4601for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4602 *dst = 0;
4603@end group
4604@end smallexample
4605
bbf115d3
L
4606@node Forced Output Alignment
4607@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4608@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4609@cindex forcing output section alignment
4610@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4611You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4612alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4613intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4614
7e7d5768
AM
4615@node Forced Input Alignment
4616@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4617@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4618@cindex forcing input section alignment
4619@cindex input section alignment
4620You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4621SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4622sections, whether larger or smaller.
4623
0c71d759
NC
4624@node Output Section Constraint
4625@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4626@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4627@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4628@cindex constraints on output sections
4629You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4630of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4631read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4632@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4633
252b5132 4634@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4635@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4636@kindex >@var{region}
4637@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4638@cindex memory regions and sections
4639You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4640using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4641
4642Here is a simple example:
4643@smallexample
4644@group
4645MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4646SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4647@end group
4648@end smallexample
4649
4650@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4651@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4652@kindex :@var{phdr}
4653@cindex section, assigning to program header
4654@cindex program headers and sections
4655You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4656using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4657one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4658assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4659@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4660linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4661
4662Here is a simple example:
4663@smallexample
4664@group
4665PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4666SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4667@end group
4668@end smallexample
4669
4670@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4671@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4672@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4673@cindex section fill pattern
4674@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4675You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4676@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4677(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4678within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4679alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4680necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4681of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4682an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4683fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4684other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4685pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4686expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4687
4688You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4689output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4690
4691Here is a simple example:
4692@smallexample
4693@group
563e308f 4694SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4695@end group
4696@end smallexample
4697
4698@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4699@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4700@kindex OVERLAY
4701@cindex overlays
4702An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4703are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4704the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4705copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4706required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4707can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4708than another.
4709
4710Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4711@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4712output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4713command is as follows:
4714@smallexample
4715@group
4716OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4717 @{
4718 @var{secname1}
4719 @{
4720 @var{output-section-command}
4721 @var{output-section-command}
4722 @dots{}
4723 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4724 @var{secname2}
4725 @{
4726 @var{output-section-command}
4727 @var{output-section-command}
4728 @dots{}
4729 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4730 @dots{}
4731 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4732@end group
4733@end smallexample
4734
4735Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4736section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4737section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4738those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4739except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4740sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4741
4742The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4743addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4744memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4745whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4746and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4747and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4748
56dd11f0
NC
4749If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4750references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4751the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4752sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4753@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4754
4755For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4756provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4757defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4758@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4759the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4760within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4761symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4762
4763At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4764the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4765
4766Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4767@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4768@smallexample
4769@group
4770 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4771 @{
4772 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4773 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4774 @}
4775@end group
4776@end smallexample
4777@noindent
4778This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4779address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4780@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4781following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4782@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4783@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4784
4785C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4786like the following.
4787
4788@smallexample
4789@group
4790 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4791 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4792 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4793@end group
4794@end smallexample
4795
4796Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4797everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4798example could have been written identically as follows.
4799
4800@smallexample
4801@group
4802 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4803 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4804 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4805 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4806 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4807 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4808 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4809@end group
4810@end smallexample
4811
4812@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4813@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4814@kindex MEMORY
4815@cindex memory regions
4816@cindex regions of memory
4817@cindex allocating memory
4818@cindex discontinuous memory
4819The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4820memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4821
4822The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4823memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4824may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4825can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4826set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4827regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4828around to fit into the available regions.
4829
4830A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4831command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4832you wish. The syntax is:
4833@smallexample
4834@group
a1ab1d2a 4835MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4836 @{
4837 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4838 @dots{}
4839 @}
4840@end group
4841@end smallexample
4842
4843The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4844region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4845Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4846with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4847must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4848add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4849command.
252b5132
RH
4850
4851@cindex memory region attributes
4852The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4853whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4854not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4855@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4856section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4857the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4858them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4859
4860The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4861@table @samp
4862@item R
4863Read-only section
4864@item W
4865Read/write section
4866@item X
4867Executable section
4868@item A
4869Allocatable section
4870@item I
4871Initialized section
4872@item L
4873Same as @samp{I}
4874@item !
c09e9a8c 4875Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4876@end table
4877
4878If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4879@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4880attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4881in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4882attributes.
4883
4884@kindex ORIGIN =
4885@kindex o =
4886@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4887The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4888the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4889cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4890abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4891@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4892
4893@kindex LENGTH =
4894@kindex len =
4895@kindex l =
4896The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4897region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4898be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4899@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4900
4901In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4902available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4903and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4904linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4905is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4906or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4907explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4908region.
4909
4910@smallexample
4911@group
a1ab1d2a 4912MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4913 @{
4914 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4915 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4916 @}
4917@end group
4918@end smallexample
4919
4920Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4921specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4922@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4923a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4924output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4925was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4926the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4927output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4928region, the linker will issue an error message.
4929
3ec57632 4930It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4931expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4932@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4933
4934@smallexample
4935@group
c0065db7 4936 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4937@end group
4938@end smallexample
4939
252b5132
RH
4940@node PHDRS
4941@section PHDRS Command
4942@kindex PHDRS
4943@cindex program headers
4944@cindex ELF program headers
4945@cindex program segments
4946@cindex segments, ELF
4947The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4948@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4949loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4950program with the @samp{-p} option.
4951
4952When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4953reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4954program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4955This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4956interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4957
4958The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4959in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4960precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4961the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4962not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4963
4964The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4965generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4966ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4967
4968This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4969@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4970
4971@smallexample
4972@group
4973PHDRS
4974@{
4975 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4976 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4977@}
4978@end group
4979@end smallexample
4980
4981The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4982of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4983header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4984with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4985must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4986is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4987
4988Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4989system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4990specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4991sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4992attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4993Section Phdr}.
4994
4995It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4996merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4997repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4998contain the section.
4999
5000If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5001then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5002not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5003convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5004placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5005default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5006segment at all.
5007
5008@kindex FILEHDR
5009@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5010You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5011the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5012The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5013file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5014include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5015segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5016these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5017
5018The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5019value of the keyword.
5020
5021@table @asis
5022@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5023Indicates an unused program header.
5024
5025@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5026Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5027the file.
5028
5029@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5030Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5031
5032@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5033Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5034found.
5035
5036@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5037Indicates a segment holding note information.
5038
5039@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5040A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5041ABI.
5042
5043@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5044Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5045
5046@item @var{expression}
5047An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5048be used for types not defined above.
5049@end table
5050
5051You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5052in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5053@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5054Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5055output section attribute.
5056
5057The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5058which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5059explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5060an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5061header.
5062
5063Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5064headers used on a native ELF system.
5065
5066@example
5067@group
5068PHDRS
5069@{
5070 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5071 interp PT_INTERP ;
5072 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5073 data PT_LOAD ;
5074 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5075@}
5076
5077SECTIONS
5078@{
5079 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5080 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5081 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5082 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5083 @dots{}
5084 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5085 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5086 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5087 @dots{}
5088@}
5089@end group
5090@end example
5091
5092@node VERSION
5093@section VERSION Command
5094@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5095@cindex symbol versions
5096@cindex version script
5097@cindex versions of symbols
5098The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5099only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5100symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5101a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5102shared library.
5103
5104You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5105you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5106also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5107
5108The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5109@smallexample
5110VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5111@end smallexample
5112
5113The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5114Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5115version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5116version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5117version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5118scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5119library.
5120
5121The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5122examples.
5123
5124@smallexample
5125VERS_1.1 @{
5126 global:
5127 foo1;
5128 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5129 old*;
5130 original*;
5131 new*;
252b5132
RH
5132@};
5133
5134VERS_1.2 @{
5135 foo2;
5136@} VERS_1.1;
5137
5138VERS_2.0 @{
5139 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5140 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5141 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5142 "f(int, double)";
5143 @};
252b5132
RH
5144@} VERS_1.2;
5145@end smallexample
5146
5147This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5148version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5149The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5150a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5151of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5152symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5153is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5154in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5155However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5156name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5157
5158Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5159depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5160to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5161
5162Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5163depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5164and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5165
5166When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5167specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5168unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5169unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5170somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5171wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5172wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5173set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5174ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5175
5176The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5177they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5178could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5179However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5180
0f6bf451 5181Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5182in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5183symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5184won't.
5185
5186@smallexample
7c9c73be 5187@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5188@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5189
252b5132
RH
5190When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5191symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5192requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5193shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5194loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5195linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5196application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5197way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5198all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5199search for each symbol reference.
5200
5201The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5202doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5203that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5204functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5205the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5206required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5207that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5208versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5209the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5210
5211There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5212first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5213source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5214script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5215maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5216@smallexample
5217__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5218@end smallexample
5219@noindent
5220in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5221be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5222The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5223@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5224takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5225
5226The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5227function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5228an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5229version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5230linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5231
5232To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5233source file. Here is an example:
5234
5235@smallexample
5236__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5237__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5238__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5239__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5240@end smallexample
5241
5242In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5243unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5244example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5245@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5246
5247When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5248some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5249this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5250@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5251declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5252you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5253
5254If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5255within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5256(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5257specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5258
cb840a31
L
5259You can also specify the language in the version script:
5260
5261@smallexample
5262VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5263@end smallexample
5264
c0065db7 5265The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5266The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5267demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5268patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5269@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5270
86043bbb
MM
5271Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5272described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5273or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5274the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5275whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5276cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5277might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5278should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5279expect when you upgrade.
5280
252b5132
RH
5281@node Expressions
5282@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5283@cindex expressions
5284@cindex arithmetic
5285The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5286that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5287expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5288host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5289
5290You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5291
5292The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5293expressions.
5294
5295@menu
5296* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5297* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5298* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5299* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5300* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5301* Operators:: Operators
5302* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5303* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5304* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5305@end menu
5306
5307@node Constants
5308@subsection Constants
5309@cindex integer notation
5310@cindex constants in linker scripts
5311All constants are integers.
5312
5313As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5314octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5315hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5316@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5317@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5318value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5319
5320@cindex scaled integers
5321@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5322@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5323@cindex suffixes for integers
5324@cindex integer suffixes
5325In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5326constant by
5327@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5328@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5329@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5330@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5331@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5332@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5333@tex
5334${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5335@end tex
5336@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5337respectively. For example, the following
5338all refer to the same quantity:
5339
252b5132 5340@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5341_fourk_1 = 4K;
5342_fourk_2 = 4096;
5343_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5344_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5345@end smallexample
5346
8a308ae8
NC
5347Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5348conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5349
0c71d759
NC
5350@node Symbolic Constants
5351@subsection Symbolic Constants
5352@cindex symbolic constants
5353@kindex CONSTANT
5354It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5355the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5356
5357@table @code
5358@item MAXPAGESIZE
5359@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5360The target's maximum page size.
5361
5362@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5363@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5364The target's default page size.
5365@end table
5366
5367So for example:
5368
5369@smallexample
9d5777a3 5370 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5371@end smallexample
5372
5373will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5374supported by the target.
5375
252b5132
RH
5376@node Symbols
5377@subsection Symbol Names
5378@cindex symbol names
5379@cindex names
5380@cindex quoted symbol names
5381@kindex "
5382Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5383and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5384Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5385specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5386keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5387@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5388"SECTION" = 9;
5389"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5390@end smallexample
5391
5392Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5393to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5394whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5395
ecca9871
L
5396@node Orphan Sections
5397@subsection Orphan Sections
5398@cindex orphan
5399Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5400are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5401script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5402output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5403placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5404attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5405same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5406If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5407at the end of the file.
5408
5409For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5410well as section flag.
5411
41911f68 5412If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5413the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5414__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5415section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5416orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5417representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5418character.
5419
252b5132
RH
5420@node Location Counter
5421@subsection The Location Counter
5422@kindex .
5423@cindex dot
5424@cindex location counter
5425@cindex current output location
5426The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5427current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5428location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5429within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5430anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5431
5432@cindex holes
5433Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5434moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5435location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5436and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5437doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5438
5439@smallexample
5440SECTIONS
5441@{
5442 output :
5443 @{
5444 file1(.text)
5445 . = . + 1000;
5446 file2(.text)
5447 . += 1000;
5448 file3(.text)
563e308f 5449 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5450@}
5451@end smallexample
5452@noindent
5453In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5454located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5455followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5456@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5457@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5458specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5459
5c6bbab8
NC
5460@cindex dot inside sections
5461Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5462current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5463statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5464absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5465however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5466not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5467
5468@smallexample
5469SECTIONS
5470@{
5471 . = 0x100
5472 .text: @{
5473 *(.text)
5474 . = 0x200
5475 @}
5476 . = 0x500
5477 .data: @{
5478 *(.data)
5479 . += 0x600
5480 @}
5481@}
5482@end smallexample
5483
5484The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5485and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5486the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5487much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5488move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5489and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5490the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5491the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5492
b5666f2f
AM
5493@cindex dot outside sections
5494Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5495output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5496needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5497
5498@smallexample
5499SECTIONS
5500@{
5501 start_of_text = . ;
5502 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5503 end_of_text = . ;
5504
5505 start_of_data = . ;
5506 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5507 end_of_data = . ;
5508@}
5509@end smallexample
5510
5511If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5512not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5513between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5514should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5515blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5516the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5517sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5518statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5519special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5520place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5521as follows:
5522
5523@smallexample
5524SECTIONS
5525@{
5526 start_of_text = . ;
5527 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5528 end_of_text = . ;
5529
5530 start_of_data = . ;
5531 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5532 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5533 end_of_data = . ;
5534@}
5535@end smallexample
5536
5537This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5538@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5539placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5540assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5541a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5542section. So you could write:
5543
5544@smallexample
5545SECTIONS
5546@{
5547 start_of_text = . ;
5548 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5549 end_of_text = . ;
5550
5551 . = . ;
5552 start_of_data = . ;
5553 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5554 end_of_data = . ;
5555@}
5556@end smallexample
5557
5558Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5559@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5560
252b5132
RH
5561@need 2000
5562@node Operators
5563@subsection Operators
5564@cindex operators for arithmetic
5565@cindex arithmetic operators
5566@cindex precedence in expressions
5567The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5568the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5569@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5570@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5571@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5572@smallexample
5573precedence associativity Operators Notes
5574(highest)
55751 left ! - ~ (1)
55762 left * / %
55773 left + -
55784 left >> <<
55795 left == != > < <= >=
55806 left &
55817 left |
55828 left &&
55839 left ||
558410 right ? :
558511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5586(lowest)
5587@end smallexample
5588Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5589(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5590(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5591@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5592@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5593@tex
5594\vskip \baselineskip
5595%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5596\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5597\hrule
5598\halign
5599{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5600height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5601&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5602height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5603\noalign{\hrule}
5604height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5605&highest&&&&&\cr
5606% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5607&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5608&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5609&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5610&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5611&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5612&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5613&7&&left&&|&\cr
5614&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5615&9&&left&&||&\cr
5616&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5617&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5618&lowest&&&&&\cr
5619height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5620\hrule}
5621@end tex
5622@iftex
5623{
5624@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5625@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5626@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5627}
5628@end iftex
5629@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5630
5631@node Evaluation
5632@subsection Evaluation
5633@cindex lazy evaluation
5634@cindex expression evaluation order
5635The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5636an expression when absolutely necessary.
5637
5638The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5639address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5640regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5641as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5642
5643However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5644until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5645other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5646for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5647
5648The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5649assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5650allocation.
5651
5652Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5653@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5654
5655If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5656available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5657following
5658@smallexample
5659@group
5660SECTIONS
5661 @{
a1ab1d2a 5662 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5663 @{ *(.text) @}
5664 @}
5665@end group
5666@end smallexample
5667@noindent
5668will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5669address}.
5670
5671@node Expression Section
5672@subsection The Section of an Expression
5673@cindex expression sections
5674@cindex absolute expressions
5675@cindex relative expressions
5676@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5677@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5678@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5679Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5680relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5681using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5682value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5683symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5684operations.
5685
abf4be64
AM
5686Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5687section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5688address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5689@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5690functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5691One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5692(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5693differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5694versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5695section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5696Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5697absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5698given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5699everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5700
5701In the following simple example,
252b5132 5702
7542af2a
AM
5703@smallexample
5704@group
5705SECTIONS
5706 @{
5707 . = 0x100;
5708 __executable_start = 0x100;
5709 .data :
5710 @{
5711 . = 0x10;
5712 __data_start = 0x10;
5713 *(.data)
5714 @}
5715 @dots{}
5716 @}
5717@end group
5718@end smallexample
252b5132 5719
7542af2a
AM
5720both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5721address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5722@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5723section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5724
5c3049d2
AM
5725For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5726addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5727
5728@itemize @bullet
5729@item
c05f749e
AM
5730Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5731operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5732absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5733@item
7542af2a
AM
5734Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5735relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5736and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5737@item
c05f749e
AM
5738Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5739in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5740address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5741before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5742@end itemize
5743
5744The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5745
5746@itemize @bullet
5747@item
5748An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5749@item
5750The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5751@item
9bc8bb33 5752The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5753relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5754(after above conversions) is also a number.
5755@item
5756The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5757relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5758section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5759@item
5760The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5761conversions) is an absolute address.
5762@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5763
5764You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5765to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5766create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5767section @samp{.data}:
5768@smallexample
5769SECTIONS
5770 @{
5771 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5772 @}
5773@end smallexample
5774@noindent
5775If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5776@samp{.data} section.
5777
7542af2a
AM
5778Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5779particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5780
252b5132
RH
5781@node Builtin Functions
5782@subsection Builtin Functions
5783@cindex functions in expressions
5784The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5785use in linker script expressions.
5786
5787@table @code
5788@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5789@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5790@cindex expression, absolute
5791Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5792of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5793value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5794normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5795
5796@item ADDR(@var{section})
5797@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5798@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5799Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5800script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5801the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5802@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5803@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5804the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5805@smallexample
5806@group
5807SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5808 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5809 @{
252b5132
RH
5810 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5811 @dots{}
5812 @}
5813 .output :
5814 @{
5815 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5816 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5817 @}
5818@dots{} @}
5819@end group
5820@end smallexample
5821
876f4090
NS
5822@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5823@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5824@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5825@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5826@cindex round up location counter
5827@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5828@cindex round up expression
5829@cindex align expression
5830Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5831to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5832doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5833arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5834expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5835equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5836
5837Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5838next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5839variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5840input sections:
252b5132
RH
5841@smallexample
5842@group
5843SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5844 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5845 *(.data)
5846 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5847 @}
5848@dots{} @}
5849@end group
5850@end smallexample
5851@noindent
5852The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5853a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5854a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5855of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5856
5857The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5858
362c1d1a
NS
5859@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5860@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5861@cindex section alignment
5862Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5863been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5864evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5865the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5866value in that section.
5867@smallexample
5868@group
5869SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5870 .output @{
5871 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5872 @dots{}
5873 @}
5874@dots{} @}
5875@end group
5876@end smallexample
5877
252b5132
RH
5878@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5879@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5880This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5881scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5882section.
5883
2d20f7bf
JJ
5884@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5885@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5886This is equivalent to either
5887@smallexample
5888(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5889@end smallexample
5890or
5891@smallexample
5892(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5893@end smallexample
5894@noindent
5895depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5896for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5897@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5898If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5899memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5900bytes in the on-disk file.
5901
5902This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5903any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5904@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5905be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5906working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5907
5908@noindent
5909Example:
5910@smallexample
5911 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5912@end smallexample
5913
5914@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5915@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5916This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5917evaluation purposes.
5918
5919@smallexample
5920 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5921@end smallexample
5922
a4f5ad88
JJ
5923@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5924@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5925This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5926@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5927When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5928does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5929@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5930boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5931it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5932@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5933padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5934section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5935
5936@smallexample
5937 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5938@end smallexample
5939
252b5132
RH
5940@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5941@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5942@cindex symbol defaults
5943Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5944defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5945return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5946default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5947shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5948the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5949existed, its value is preserved:
5950
5951@smallexample
5952@group
5953SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5954 .text : @{
5955 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5956 @dots{}
5957 @}
5958 @dots{}
5959@}
5960@end group
5961@end smallexample
5962
3ec57632
NC
5963@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5964@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5965Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5966
252b5132
RH
5967@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5968@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5969@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5970Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5971Section LMA}).
5972
2e53f7d6
NC
5973@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5974@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5975Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5976@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5977
252b5132
RH
5978@kindex MAX
5979@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5980Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5981
5982@kindex MIN
5983@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5984Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5985
5986@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5987@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5988@cindex unallocated address, next
5989Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5990This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5991use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5992output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5993
3ec57632
NC
5994@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5995@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5996Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5997
ba916c8a
MM
5998@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5999@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6000Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6001value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6002@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6003will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6004can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6005``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6006name.
6007
252b5132
RH
6008@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6009@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6010@cindex section size
6011Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6012been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6013evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6014@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6015@smallexample
6016@group
6017SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6018 .output @{
6019 .start = . ;
6020 @dots{}
6021 .end = . ;
6022 @}
6023 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6024 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6025@dots{} @}
6026@end group
6027@end smallexample
6028
6029@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6030@itemx sizeof_headers
6031@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6032@cindex header size
6033Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6034information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6035this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6036choose, to facilitate paging.
6037
6038@cindex not enough room for program headers
6039@cindex program headers, not enough room
6040When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6041@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6042number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6043addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6044additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6045room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6046the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6047script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6048you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6049command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6050@end table
6051
6052@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6053@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6054@cindex implicit linker scripts
6055If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6056an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6057linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6058linker will report an error.
6059
6060An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6061
6062Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6063assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6064commands.
6065
6066Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6067at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6068read. This can affect archive searching.
6069
6070@ifset GENERIC
6071@node Machine Dependent
6072@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6073
6074@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6075@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6076sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6077functionality are not listed.
6078
6079@menu
36f63dca
NC
6080@ifset H8300
6081* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6082@end ifset
6083@ifset I960
6084* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6085@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6086@ifset M68HC11
6087* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6088@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6089@ifset ARM
6090* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6091@end ifset
6092@ifset HPPA
6093* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6094@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6095@ifset M68K
6096* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6097@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6098@ifset MIPS
6099* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6100@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6101@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6102* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6103@end ifset
2469cfa2 6104@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6105* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6106@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6107@ifset NDS32
6108* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6109@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6110@ifset NIOSII
6111* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6112@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6113@ifset POWERPC
6114* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6115@end ifset
6116@ifset POWERPC64
6117* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6118@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6119@ifset SPU
6120* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6121@end ifset
74459f0e 6122@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6123* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6124@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6125@ifset WIN32
6126* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6127@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6128@ifset XTENSA
6129* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6130@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6131@end menu
6132@end ifset
6133
252b5132
RH
6134@ifset H8300
6135@ifclear GENERIC
6136@raisesections
6137@end ifclear
6138
6139@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6140@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6141
6142@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6143For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6144you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6145
6146@table @emph
6147@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6148@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6149@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6150targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6151program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6152respectively.
6153
6154@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6155@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6156@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6157@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6158sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6159page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6160(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6161@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6162top page of memory).
1502569c 6163
81f5558e
NC
6164@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6165indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6166displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6167the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6168@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6169whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6170range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6171
1502569c 6172@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6173@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6174biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6175which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6176page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6177(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6178@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6179the top page of memory).
6180
6181@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6182@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
618332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6184changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6185(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6186@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6187the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6188@end table
6189
6190@ifclear GENERIC
6191@lowersections
6192@end ifclear
6193@end ifset
6194
36f63dca 6195@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6196@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6197@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6198@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6199@node Renesas
6200@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6201
c2dcd04e
NC
6202@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6203H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6204options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6205@end ifset
6206@end ifclear
6207
6208@ifset I960
6209@ifclear GENERIC
6210@raisesections
6211@end ifclear
6212
6213@node i960
6214@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6215
6216@cindex i960 support
6217
6218You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6219specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6220family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6221incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6222linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6223libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6224search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6225
6226For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6227well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6228paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6229the names
6230
6231@smallexample
6232@group
6233try
6234libtry.a
6235tryca
6236libtryca.a
6237@end group
6238@end smallexample
6239
6240@noindent
6241The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6242two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6243
6244You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6245the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6246use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6247specifies a library.
6248
6249@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6250@cindex relaxing on i960
6251@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6252you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6253@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6254them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6255instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6256instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6257target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6258not itself call any subroutines).
6259
48229727
JB
6260@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6261@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6262@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6263The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6264
6265The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6266
85fdf906
AH
6267@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6268@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6269The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6270
36f63dca
NC
6271@ifclear GENERIC
6272@lowersections
6273@end ifclear
6274@end ifset
6275
6276@ifset ARM
6277@ifclear GENERIC
6278@raisesections
6279@end ifclear
6280
93fd0973
SC
6281@ifset M68HC11
6282@ifclear GENERIC
6283@raisesections
6284@end ifclear
6285
6286@node M68HC11/68HC12
6287@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6288
6289@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6290
6291@subsection Linker Relaxation
6292
6293For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6294optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6295
6296@table @emph
6297@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6298@item relaxing address modes
6299@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6300targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6301program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6302respectively.
6303
6304@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6305transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6306page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6307
6308@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6309When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6310of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6311addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6312@code{bset} instructions.
6313
6314@end table
6315
6316@subsection Trampoline Generation
6317
6318@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6319@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6320For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6321call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6322will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6323trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6324case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6325point to the function trampoline.
6326
6327@ifclear GENERIC
6328@lowersections
6329@end ifclear
6330@end ifset
6331
36f63dca 6332@node ARM
3674e28a 6333@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6334
6335@cindex ARM interworking support
6336@kindex --support-old-code
6337For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6338between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6339been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6340line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6341libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6342option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6343given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6344which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6345the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6346non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6347
6348@cindex thumb entry point
6349@cindex entry point, thumb
6350@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6351The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6352@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6353But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6354branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6355executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6356
ce11ba6c
KT
6357@cindex PE import table prefixing
6358@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6359The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6360the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6361element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6362import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6363
e489d0ae
PB
6364@cindex BE8
6365@kindex --be8
6366The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6367executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6368The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6369
3674e28a
PB
6370@cindex TARGET1
6371@kindex --target1-rel
6372@kindex --target1-abs
6373The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6374@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6375or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6376and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6377
6378@cindex TARGET2
6379@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6380The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6381@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6382meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6383@table @samp
6384@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6385@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6386@item abs
6387@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6388@item got-rel
6389@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6390@end table
6391
319850b4
JB
6392@cindex FIX_V4BX
6393@kindex --fix-v4bx
6394The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6395specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6396interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6397also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6398
6399In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6400linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6401@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6402
6403In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6404relocations are ignored.
6405
845b51d6
PB
6406@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6407@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6408Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6409relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6410
6411@smallexample
6412TST rM, #1
6413MOVEQ PC, rM
6414BX Rn
6415@end smallexample
6416
6417This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6418and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6419condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6420
33bfe774
JB
6421@cindex USE_BLX
6422@kindex --use-blx
6423The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6424BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6425situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6426code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6427each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6428
6429This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6430specify it if you are using that target.
6431
c6dd86c6
JB
6432@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6433@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6434The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6435bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6436instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6437to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6438the support code can read the intended values.
6439
6440The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6441intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6442and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6443intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6444full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6445you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6446
6447If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6448enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6449@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6450mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6451vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6452@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6453
6454If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6455potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6456such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6457first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6458instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6459the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6460are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6461
2de70689
MGD
6462@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6463@kindex --fix-arm1176
6464@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6465The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6466in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6467are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6468unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6469
9d5777a3 6470Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6471Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6472http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6473
bf21ed78
MS
6474@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6475@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6476The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6477warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6478enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6479linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6480using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6481not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6482
6483@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6484@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6485The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6486warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6487@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6488linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6489using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6490
726150b7
NC
6491@cindex PIC_VENEER
6492@kindex --pic-veneer
6493The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6494ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6495is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6496@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6497
6498@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6499@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6500The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6501code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6502perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6503placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6504controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6505The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6506duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6507group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6508code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6509where they should be placed.
6510
6511The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6512@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6513placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6514branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6515placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6516value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6517exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6518A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6519linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6520from the input sections.
6521
6522The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6523@samp{N = +1}.
6524
1a51c1a4
NC
6525Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6526only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6527otherwise.
6528
36f63dca
NC
6529@ifclear GENERIC
6530@lowersections
6531@end ifclear
6532@end ifset
6533
6534@ifset HPPA
6535@ifclear GENERIC
6536@raisesections
6537@end ifclear
6538
6539@node HPPA ELF32
6540@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6541@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6542@kindex --multi-subspace
6543When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6544import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6545The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6546stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6547multiple sub-spaces.
6548
6549@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6550@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6551Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6552stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6553@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6554sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6555a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6556the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6557conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6558prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6559A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6560branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6561@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6562@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6563detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6564positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6565
6566Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6567single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6568create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6569large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6570
6571@ifclear GENERIC
6572@lowersections
6573@end ifclear
6574@end ifset
6575
7fb9f789
NC
6576@ifset M68K
6577@ifclear GENERIC
6578@raisesections
6579@end ifclear
6580
6581@node M68K
6582@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6583
6584@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6585@kindex --got=@var{type}
6586The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6587The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6588@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6589the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6590@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6591entries only at non-negative offsets.
6592@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6593entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6594support such GOTs.
6595@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6596output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6597file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6598files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6599
6600@ifclear GENERIC
6601@lowersections
6602@end ifclear
6603@end ifset
6604
833794fc
MR
6605@ifset MIPS
6606@ifclear GENERIC
6607@raisesections
6608@end ifclear
6609
6610@node MIPS
6611@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6612
6613@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6614@kindex --insn32
6615@kindex --no-insn32
6616The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6617microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6618in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6619used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6620or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6621including 16-bit ones where possible.
6622
6623@ifclear GENERIC
6624@lowersections
6625@end ifclear
6626@end ifset
6627
36f63dca
NC
6628@ifset MMIX
6629@ifclear GENERIC
6630@raisesections
6631@end ifclear
6632
6633@node MMIX
6634@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6635For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6636@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6637understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6638can translate between the two formats.
6639
6640There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6641Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6642registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6643equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6644@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6645global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6646this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6647symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6648
7a2de473
HPN
6649Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6650@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6651The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6652of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6653
6654Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6655are left out from an mmo file.
6656
6657@ifclear GENERIC
6658@lowersections
6659@end ifclear
6660@end ifset
6661
6662@ifset MSP430
6663@ifclear GENERIC
6664@raisesections
6665@end ifclear
6666
6667@node MSP430
6668@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6669For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6670will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6671just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6672
6673@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6674The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6675
6676@table @code
6677@item @samp{.vectors}
6678Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6679
6680@item @samp{.bootloader}
6681Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6682in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6683
6684@item @samp{.infomem}
6685Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6686this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6687
c0065db7 6688@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6689This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6690in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6691
6692@item @samp{.noinit}
6693Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6694
c0065db7 6695The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6696@end table
6697
6698@ifclear GENERIC
6699@lowersections
6700@end ifclear
6701@end ifset
6702
35c08157
KLC
6703@ifset NDS32
6704@ifclear GENERIC
6705@raisesections
6706@end ifclear
6707
6708@node NDS32
6709@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6710@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6711For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6712relaxes objects according to these options.
6713
6714@table @code
6715@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6716Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6717
6718@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6719Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6720
6721@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6722Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6723
6724@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6725Export the EX9 table after linking.
6726
6727@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6728Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6729
6730@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6731Update the existing EX9 table.
6732
6733@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6734Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6735
6736@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6737Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6738
6739@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6740Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6741
6742@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6743Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6744@end table
6745
6746@ifclear GENERIC
6747@lowersections
6748@end ifclear
6749@end ifset
6750
78058a5e
SL
6751@ifset NIOSII
6752@ifclear GENERIC
6753@raisesections
6754@end ifclear
6755
6756@node Nios II
6757@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6758@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6759@kindex --relax on Nios II
6760
6761Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6762transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6763which may result in @command{ld} giving
6764@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6765The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6766trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6767outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6768trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6769be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6770larger than 256MB.
6771
6772The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6773is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6774@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6775locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6776source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6777register as a temporary.
6778
6779Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6780relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6781option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6782
6783@ifclear GENERIC
6784@lowersections
6785@end ifclear
6786@end ifset
6787
2a60a7a8
AM
6788@ifset POWERPC
6789@ifclear GENERIC
6790@raisesections
6791@end ifclear
6792
6793@node PowerPC ELF32
6794@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6795@cindex PowerPC long branches
6796@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6797Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6798displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6799@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6800@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6801the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6802section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6803section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6804@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6805both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6806considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6807
6808@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6809@table @option
6810@cindex PowerPC PLT
6811@kindex --bss-plt
6812@item --bss-plt
6813Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6814generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6815the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6816writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6817@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6818PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6819compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6820BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6821
016687f8
AM
6822@kindex --secure-plt
6823@item --secure-plt
6824@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6825@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6826when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6827layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6828style BSS PLT.
6829
2a60a7a8
AM
6830@cindex PowerPC GOT
6831@kindex --sdata-got
6832@item --sdata-got
6833The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6834sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6835@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6836section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6837@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6838@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6839@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6840@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6841PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6842pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6843GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6844really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6845
6846@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6847@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6848@item --emit-stub-syms
6849This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6850symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6851
6852@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6853@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6854@item --no-tls-optimize
6855PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6856sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6857disable the optimization.
6858@end table
6859
6860@ifclear GENERIC
6861@lowersections
6862@end ifclear
6863@end ifset
6864
6865@ifset POWERPC64
6866@ifclear GENERIC
6867@raisesections
6868@end ifclear
6869
6870@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6871@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6872
6873@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6874@table @option
6875@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6876@kindex --stub-group-size
6877@item --stub-group-size
6878Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6879by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6880@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6881sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6882a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6883the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6884conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6885prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6886A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6887branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6888@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6889@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6890detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6891positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6892
6893Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6894single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6895create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6896large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6897
6898@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6899@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6900@item --emit-stub-syms
6901This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6902symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6903
6904@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6905@kindex --dotsyms
6906@kindex --no-dotsyms
6907@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6908These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6909in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6910function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6911code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6912properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6913to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6914@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6915dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6916feature.
6917
6918@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6919@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6920@item --no-tls-optimize
6921PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6922sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6923disable the optimization.
6924
6925@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6926@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6927@item --no-opd-optimize
6928PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6929corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6930the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6931Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6932
6933@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6934@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6935@item --non-overlapping-opd
6936Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6937@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6938the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6939entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6940
6941@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6942@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6943@item --no-toc-optimize
6944PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6945entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6946reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6947marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6948marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6949relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6950unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6951reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6952discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6953reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6954code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6955optimization.
6956
6957@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6958@kindex --no-multi-toc
6959@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6960If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6961@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6962where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6963entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6964total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6965grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6966TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6967calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6968help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
696964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6970Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6971
6972@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6973@kindex --no-toc-sort
6974@item --no-toc-sort
6975By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6976happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6977placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6978with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6979referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6980@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6981results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6982off this feature.
6983
6984@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6985@kindex --plt-align
6986@kindex --no-plt-align
6987@item --plt-align
6988@itemx --no-plt-align
6989Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6990aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6991boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6992are packed tightly.
6993
6994@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6995@kindex --plt-static-chain
6996@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6997@item --plt-static-chain
6998@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6999Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7000chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7001chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7002
7003@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7004@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7005@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7006@item --plt-thread-safe
7007@itemx --no-thread-safe
7008With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7009lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7010another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7011order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7012memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7013barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7014looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7015seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7016default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7017@end table
7018
7019@ifclear GENERIC
7020@lowersections
7021@end ifclear
7022@end ifset
7023
49fa1e15
AM
7024@ifset SPU
7025@ifclear GENERIC
7026@raisesections
7027@end ifclear
7028
7029@node SPU ELF
7030@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7031
7032@cindex SPU ELF options
7033@table @option
7034
7035@cindex SPU plugins
7036@kindex --plugin
7037@item --plugin
7038This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7039
7040@cindex SPU overlays
7041@kindex --no-overlays
7042@item --no-overlays
7043Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7044regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7045@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7046turns off all this special overlay handling.
7047
7048@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7049@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7050@item --emit-stub-syms
7051This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7052symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7053
7054@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7055@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7056@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7057This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7058function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7059on calls to non-overlay regions.
7060
7061@cindex SPU local store size
7062@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7063@item --local-store=lo:hi
7064@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7065the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7066range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7067
c0065db7 7068@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7069@kindex --stack-analysis
7070@item --stack-analysis
7071SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7072unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7073under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7074@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7075@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7076determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7077for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7078for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7079for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7080find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7081and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7082under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7083dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7084is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7085and calls will be given.
7086
c0065db7 7087@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7088@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7089@item --emit-stack-syms
7090This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7091in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7092These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7093functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7094functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7095such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7096The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7097@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7098@end table
7099
7100@ifclear GENERIC
7101@lowersections
7102@end ifclear
7103@end ifset
7104
36f63dca
NC
7105@ifset TICOFF
7106@ifclear GENERIC
7107@raisesections
7108@end ifclear
7109
7110@node TI COFF
7111@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7112@cindex TI COFF versions
7113@kindex --format=@var{version}
7114The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7115TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7116also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7117format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7118header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7119
7120@ifclear GENERIC
7121@lowersections
7122@end ifclear
7123@end ifset
7124
2ca22b03
NC
7125@ifset WIN32
7126@ifclear GENERIC
7127@raisesections
7128@end ifclear
7129
7130@node WIN32
7131@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7132
c0065db7 7133This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7134See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7135command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7136
7137@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7138@cindex import libraries
7139@item import libraries
69da35b5 7140The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7141libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7142regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7143archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7144support for creating such libraries provided with the
7145@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7146
c0065db7
RM
7147@item exporting DLL symbols
7148@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7149The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7150
7151@table @emph
7152@item using auto-export functionality
7153@cindex using auto-export functionality
7154By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7155which is controlled by the following command line options:
7156
0a5d968e
NC
7157@itemize
7158@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7159@item --exclude-symbols
7160@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7161@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7162@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7163@end itemize
7164
09e2aba4
DK
7165When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7166(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7167symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7168often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7169private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7170options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7171exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7172final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7173
7174If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7175command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7176if either of the following are true:
7177
7178@itemize
7179@item A DEF file is used.
7180@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7181@end itemize
dc8465bf 7182
c0065db7
RM
7183@item using a DEF file
7184@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7185Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7186an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7187exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7188name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7189command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7190
7191@example
7192gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7193@end example
7194
0a5d968e
NC
7195Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7196@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7197
dc8465bf
NC
7198Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7199
7200@example
4b5bd4e7 7201LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7202
7203EXPORTS
7204foo
7205bar
7206_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7207another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7208var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7209doo = foo == foo2
7210eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7211@end example
dc8465bf 7212
7fcab871 7213This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7214symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7215alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7216by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7217@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7218@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7219export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7220in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7221symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7222
6b31ad16
DS
7223The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7224name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7225the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7226
b45619c0
NC
7227When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7228library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7229@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7230executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7231
7232With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7233specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7234non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7235
7236If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7237or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7238filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7239
4b5bd4e7
DS
7240The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7241
7242@example
7243EXPORTS
7244 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7245 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7246 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7247@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7248
7249Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7250@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7251@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7252@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7253Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7254@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7255string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7256
7257The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7258
7259@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7260will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7261by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7262linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7263library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7264
7265@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7266The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7267the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7268@code{*_imp__foo}).
7269
7270@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7271well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7272read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7273variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7274the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7275extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7276application will behave unexpectedly.
7277
7278@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7279it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7280symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7281API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7282the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7283
4b5bd4e7
DS
7284See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7285other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7286
7287@cindex creating a DEF file
7288While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7289with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7290
7291@item Using decorations
7292@cindex Using decorations
7293Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7294itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7295declared as:
7296
7297@example
7298__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7299__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7300@end example
7301
7302All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7303any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7304this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7305the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7306
7307Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7308decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7309instead:
7310
7311@example
7312__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7313__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7314@end example
7315
c0065db7
RM
7316This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7317when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7318variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7319code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7320of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7321omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7322@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7323information.
c0065db7 7324@end table
dc8465bf 7325
2ca22b03
NC
7326@cindex automatic data imports
7327@item automatic data imports
7328The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7329by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7330compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7331issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7332code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7333c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7334initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7335decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7336platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7337command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7338The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7339suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7340trigger the feature's use.
7341
c0065db7 7342auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7343additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7344
c0065db7 7345"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7346documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7347
c0065db7
RM
7348The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7349occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7350One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7351below.
7352
7353@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7354For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7355object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7356offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7357field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7358in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7359without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7360The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7361references.
7362
c0065db7
RM
7363The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7364be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7365themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7366runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7367compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7368support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7369run without error on an older system.
7370
c0065db7
RM
7371@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7372enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7373
7374@cindex direct linking to a dll
7375@item direct linking to a dll
7376The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7377including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7378libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7379traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7380libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7381function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7382though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7383storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7384tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7385large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7386
c0065db7 7387Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7388@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7389of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7390perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7391select the dll instead of an import library.
7392
2ca22b03 7393
69da35b5
NC
7394For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7395to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7396
7397@example
45e948fe
NC
7398libxxx.dll.a
7399xxx.dll.a
7400libxxx.a
7401xxx.lib
69da35b5 7402cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7403libxxx.dll
7404xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7405@end example
7406
69da35b5
NC
7407before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7408
c0065db7
RM
7409(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7410where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7411@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7412file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7413@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7414
c0065db7
RM
7415Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7416@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7417was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7418various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7419could coexist on the same machine.
7420
2ca22b03
NC
7421The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7422applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7423libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7424
7425@example
7426bin/
7427 cygxxx.dll
7428lib/
7429 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7430 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7431@end example
7432
c0065db7
RM
7433Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7434done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7435
74361. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7437@example
7438gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7439@end example
2ca22b03 7440
69da35b5
NC
7441However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7442(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7443@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7444not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7445
2ca22b03
NC
74462. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7447directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7448should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7449making the app/dll.
7450
7451@example
7452ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7453@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7454
7455Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7456
7457@example
7458gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7459@end example
69da35b5
NC
7460
7461This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7462perfectly legal
7463
7464@example
7465bin/
7466 cygxxx-5.dll
7467lib/
c0065db7 7468 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7469@end example
7470
dc8465bf 7471Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7472even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7473@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7474
7475Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7476wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7477
74781. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7479work with auto-imported data.
7480
dc8465bf
NC
74812. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7482import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7483symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7484for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7485possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7486
45e948fe
NC
74873. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7488critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7489in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7490stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7491
69da35b5 7492So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7493true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7494a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7495binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7496massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7497requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7498will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7499
c0065db7 7500@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7501@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7502@item adding additional names
7503Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7504A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7505exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7506when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7507import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7508
c0065db7 7509@example
dc8465bf
NC
7510LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7511
7512EXPORTS
c0065db7 7513foo
dc8465bf 7514_foo = foo
c0065db7 7515@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7516
7517The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7518
7519Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7520source code using the "weak" attribute:
7521
c0065db7
RM
7522@example
7523void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7524void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7525@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7526
7527See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7528symbols.
7529
7530@item renaming symbols
7531Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7532kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7533@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7534DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7535created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7536
c0065db7 7537@example
dc8465bf
NC
7538LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7539
7540EXPORTS
7541_foo = foo
c0065db7 7542@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7543
7544The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7545@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7546@end table
dc8465bf 7547
0a5d968e 7548Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7549unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7550If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7551@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7552that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7553@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7554renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7555to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7556the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7557In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7558which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7559
7560@cindex weak externals
7561@item weak externals
7562The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7563weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7564defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7565are three variants of weak externals:
7566@itemize
7567@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7568called lazy externals.
7569@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7570This form is not presently implemented.
7571@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7572implemented.
7573@end itemize
7574As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7575are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7576uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7577
7578@cindex aligned common symbols
7579@item aligned common symbols
7580As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7581desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7582the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7583carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7584by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7585tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7586but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7587warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7588@end table
7589
7590@ifclear GENERIC
7591@lowersections
7592@end ifclear
7593@end ifset
7594
e0001a05
NC
7595@ifset XTENSA
7596@ifclear GENERIC
7597@raisesections
7598@end ifclear
7599
7600@node Xtensa
7601@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7602
7603@cindex Xtensa processors
7604The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7605@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7606specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7607keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7608example, with the command:
7609
7610@smallexample
7611SECTIONS
7612@{
7613 .text : @{
7614 *(.literal .text)
7615 @}
7616@}
7617@end smallexample
7618
7619@noindent
7620@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7621and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7622literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7623interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7624group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7625files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7626and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7627
43cd72b9 7628@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7629@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7630Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7631provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7632is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7633literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7634will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7635location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7636the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7637unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7638@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7639range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7640
7641For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7642to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7643instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7644instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7645instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7646@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7647hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7648By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7649switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7650density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7651instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7652performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7653linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7654a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7655
7656The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7657control the linker:
7658
7659@cindex Xtensa options
7660@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7661@item --size-opt
7662When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7663more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7664no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7665alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7666preserve the correctness of the code.
7667@end table
e0001a05
NC
7668
7669@ifclear GENERIC
7670@lowersections
7671@end ifclear
7672@end ifset
7673
252b5132
RH
7674@ifclear SingleFormat
7675@node BFD
7676@chapter BFD
7677
7678@cindex back end
7679@cindex object file management
7680@cindex object formats available
7681@kindex objdump -i
7682The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7683These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7684object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7685format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7686it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7687associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7688object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7689(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7690list all the formats available for your configuration.
7691
7692@cindex BFD requirements
7693@cindex requirements for BFD
7694As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7695several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7696BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7697formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7698been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7699BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7700may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7701
7702One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7703mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7704useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7705conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7706
7707@menu
7708* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7709@end menu
7710
7711@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7712@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7713@cindex opening object files
7714@include bfdsumm.texi
7715@end ifclear
7716
7717@node Reporting Bugs
7718@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7719@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7720@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7721
ff5dcc92 7722Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7723
7724Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7725it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7726to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7727work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7728@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7729
7730In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7731information that enables us to fix the bug.
7732
7733@menu
7734* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7735* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7736@end menu
7737
7738@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7739@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7740@cindex bug criteria
7741
7742If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7743
7744@itemize @bullet
7745@cindex fatal signal
7746@cindex linker crash
7747@cindex crash of linker
7748@item
7749If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7750@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7751
7752@cindex error on valid input
7753@item
ff5dcc92 7754If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7755
7756@cindex invalid input
7757@item
ff5dcc92 7758If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7759may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7760object files are correct.
7761
7762@item
7763If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7764improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7765@end itemize
7766
7767@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7768@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7769@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7770@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7771
7772A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7773products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7774recommend you contact that organization first.
7775
7776You can find contact information for many support companies and
7777individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7778distribution.
7779
ad22bfe8 7780@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7781Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7782@value{BUGURL}.
7783@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7784
7785The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7786@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7787fact or leave it out, state it!
7788
7789Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7790problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7791assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7792matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7793the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7794location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7795were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7796into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7797specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7798and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7799
7800Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7801the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7802on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7803
7804Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7805bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7806respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7807You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7808
7809To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7810
7811@itemize @bullet
7812@item
ff5dcc92 7813The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7814the @samp{--version} argument.
7815
7816Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7817the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7818
7819@item
ff5dcc92 7820Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7821patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7822
7823@item
7824The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7825version number.
7826
7827@item
ff5dcc92 7828What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7829``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7830
7831@item
7832The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7833observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7834list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7835sufficient.
7836
7837If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7838and then we might not encounter the bug.
7839
7840@item
7841A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7842bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7843provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7844bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7845state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7846requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7847we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7848attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7849
7850If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7851@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7852object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7853@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7854how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7855
7856@item
7857A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7858incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7859
ff5dcc92 7860Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7861will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7862not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7863a chance to make a mistake.
7864
7865Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7866say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7867copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7868C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7869and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7870fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7871you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7872any conclusion from our observations.
7873
7874@item
ff5dcc92 7875If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7876diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7877@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7878If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7879context, not by line number.
7880
7881The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7882sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7883@end itemize
7884
7885Here are some things that are not necessary:
7886
7887@itemize @bullet
7888@item
7889A description of the envelope of the bug.
7890
7891Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7892which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7893changes will not affect it.
7894
7895This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7896will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7897with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7898We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7899
7900Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7901of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7902output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7903less time, and so on.
7904
7905However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7906report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7907
7908@item
7909A patch for the bug.
7910
7911A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7912the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7913a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7914to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7915
ff5dcc92 7916Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7917construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7918through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7919able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7920fixed.
7921
7922And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7923patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7924help us to understand.
7925
7926@item
7927A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7928
7929Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7930things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7931@end itemize
7932
7933@node MRI
7934@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7935@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7936To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7937linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7938alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7939described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7940simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7941@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7942linker commands; these commands are described here.
7943
7944In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7945file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7946features to make use of them.
7947
7948You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7949@samp{-c} command-line option.
7950
7951Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7952command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7953blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7954MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7955issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7956
7957Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7958
7959You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7960lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7961The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7962
7963@table @code
7964@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7965@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7966@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7967Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7968the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7969@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7970your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7971script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7972commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7973input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7974@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7975
7976@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7977@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7978Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7979in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7980
7981@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7982
7983@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7984@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7985Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7986@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7987
7988@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7989@item BASE @var{expression}
7990Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7991absolute addresses) in the output file.
7992
7993@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7994@item CHIP @var{expression}
7995@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7996This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7997
7998@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7999@item END
8000This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8001
8002@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8003@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8004Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8005language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8006
8007@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8008@item
252b5132
RH
8009S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8010
8011@item
8012IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8013
8014@item
8015COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8016@samp{COFF}
8017@end enumerate
8018
8019@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8020@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8021Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8022@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8023
8024The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8025same line, with no change in its effect.
8026
8027@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8028@item LOAD @var{filename}
8029@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8030Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8031same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8032command line.
8033
8034@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8035@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8036@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8037MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8038option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8039
8040@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8041@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8042@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8043Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8044order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8045script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8046sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8047file, in the order specified.
8048
8049@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8050@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8051@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8052@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8053Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8054@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8055
8056@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8057@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8058@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8059@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8060You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8061specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8062If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8063@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8064@end table
8065
793c5807
NC
8066@node GNU Free Documentation License
8067@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8068@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8069
370b66a1
CD
8070@node LD Index
8071@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8072
8073@printindex cp
8074
8075@tex
7ca01ed9 8076% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8077% meantime:
8078\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8079\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8080\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8081\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8082\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8083\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8084\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8085\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8086\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8087% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8088@end tex
8089
252b5132 8090@bye